advertisement
* 5 1 0
5100001497
0 0 0 1 4 9 7 0 1 *
08-08-1N
AT-500_e.book 1 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
201b
202
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3), and “IMPORTANT NOTES”
(p. 6). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of
the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s manual should be read in its entirety.
The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 2008 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
AT-500_e.book 2 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
WARNING:
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION
: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION
: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
- When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1.
Read these instructions.
2.
Keep these instructions.
3.
Heed all warnings.
4.
Follow all instructions.
5.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
6.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
7.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
8.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
For the U.K.
IMPORTANT:
THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
BLUE:
BROWN:
NEUTRAL
LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.
2
AT-500_e.book 3 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly.
* Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings, as well to domestic animals or pets.
The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle.
In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the unit must never be disassembled.
The
●
symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out. The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
Do not disassemble or modify
002a
Do not disassemble or modify this device.
......................................................................................
Do not repair or replace parts
003
Never attempt to repair this device or replace parts. If repair or part replacement should become necessary, you must contact your dealer or a
Roland service center.
......................................................................................
Do not use or store in the following types of locations
004
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are
• Exposed to steam or smoke; or are
• Subject to salt exposure; or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty or sandy; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration and shakiness.
......................................................................................
Do not place in an unstable location
007
Do not place this device on an unstable stand or a tilted surface. You must place it in a stable and level location.
......................................................................................
Connect the power cord to an outlet of the correct voltage
008a
You must connect the power cord to an AC outlet of the correct voltage as marked on the device.
......................................................................................
Use only the included power cord
008e
You must use only the power cord included with the device. Do not use the included power cord with any other device.
......................................................................................
Do not bend the power cord or place heavy objects on it
009
Do not bend the power cord excessively, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Doing so will damage the power cord, and may cause short circuits or faulty connections, possibly resulting in fire or electrical shock.
......................................................................................
Do not share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices
015
Do not connect excessive numbers of electrical devices to a single power outlet. In particular, when using a power strip, exceeding the rated capacity (watts/amps) of the power strip may cause heat to be generated, possibly melting the cable.
......................................................................................
Avoid extended use at high volume
010
This device, either by itself or used in conjunction with headphones, amps, and/or speakers, is capable of producing volume levels that can cause permanent hearing damage. If you experience impaired hearing or ringing in your ears, immediately stop using the device and consult a medical specialist.
......................................................................................
Do not insert foreign objects
011
Never allow foreign objects (flammable objects, coins, wires, etc.) to enter this device.
This can cause short circuits or other malfunctions.
......................................................................................
3
AT-500_e.book 4 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
Turn off the power if an abnormality or malfunction occurs
012a
If any of the following should occur, immediately turn off the power, disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and contact your dealer or a service center to have the device serviced.
• The power cord is damaged
• The device produces smoke or an unusual smell
• A foreign object enters the device, or liquid spills into the device
• The device becomes wet (by rain, etc.)
• An abnormality or malfunction occurs in the device
......................................................................................
Do not allow children to use without supervision
013
In households with children, take particular care against tampering. If children are to use this device, they must be supervised or guided by an adult.
......................................................................................
Do not drop or subject to strong impact
014
Do not drop this device or subject it to strong impact.
......................................................................................
Do not use overseas
016
If you wish to use this device overseas, please contact your dealer or a service center.
......................................................................................
Do not use a CD-ROM in an audio CD player or
DVD player
023
If you attempt to play back a CD-ROM in a conventional audio CD player or DVD player, the resulting high volume may damage your hearing or your speakers.
......................................................................................
Do not place containers of water on the device
026
Do not place containers of water (such as a flower vase) or drinks on the device. Nor should you place containers of insecticide, perfume, alcoholic liquids, nail polish, or spray cans on the device.
Liquids that spill into the device may cause it to malfunction, and may cause short circuits or faulty operation.
......................................................................................
Place in a well ventilated location
101a
When using this device, ensure that it is placed in a well ventilated location.
..........................................................................................................
Grasp the plug when connecting or disconnecting the power cord
102b
When connecting or disconnecting the power cord to/from an AC outlet or the device itself, you must grasp the plug, not the cord.
..........................................................................................................
Periodically wipe the dust off the power cord plug
103a
From time to time, you should unplug the power cord from the AC outlet and use a dry cloth to wipe the dust off of it. You should also unplug the power cord from the AC outlet if you will not be using the device for an extended period of time. Dust or dirt that accumulates between the power cord plug and the AC outlet can cause a short circuit, possibly resulting in fire.
..........................................................................................................
Manage cables for safety
104
Ensure that the connected cables are organized and managed in a safe manner. In particular, place the cables out of reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
Do not stand or place heavy objects on this device
106
Do not stand on this device, or place heavy objects on it.
..........................................................................................................
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands
107b
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord to the device or AC outlet while holding the power cord plug with wet hands.
..........................................................................................................
Cautions when moving this device
108d
If you need to move the instrument, take note of the precautions listed below. Since this product is very heavy, you must make sure that a sufficient number of people are on hand to help, so you can lift and move it safely, without causing strain. It should be handled carefully, all the while keeping it level.
Make sure to have a firm grip, to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage.
1
2
• Check whether the knob bolts fastening the device to its stand have become loose. If they are loose, tighten them firmly.
• Disconnect the power cord.
3 • Disconnect external devices.
5
• Close the lid.
6
• Remove the music stand.
..........................................................................................................
4
AT-500_e.book 5 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before cleaning
109a
Before you clean the device, turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.
..........................................................................................................
If there is a possibility of lightning strike, disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet
110a
If there is a possibility of lightning strike, immediately turn off the power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet.
..........................................................................................................
Cautions when opening/closing the lid
116
Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you do
not get your fingers pinched (p. 21). Adult super-
vision is recommended whenever small children use the unit.
..........................................................................................................
Cautions when using the seat
117: Selection
You must observe the following cautions when using the seat.
1
• Do not play with the seat or use it as a stepstool.
2
• Do not allow two or more people to sit on the seat simultaneously.
4
• Do not sit on the seat if the bolts fastening the legs are loose. (If they are loose, use the included tool to retighten them.)
..........................................................................................................
Keep small items out of the reach of children
118b
To prevent small items such as the following from being swallowed accidentally, keep them out of the reach of children.
• Included items
• Music rest attachment screws
• Screws for assembling the stand
• Cord clamps
• Caps
• Knob bolts
..........................................................................................................
203
* GS ( ) is a registered trademark of Roland
Corporation.
Add
* XGlite ( ) is a registered trademark of Yamaha
Corporation.
220
* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
5
AT-500_e.book 6 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Important Notes
Power Supply
301
• Do not connect this device to the same electrical outlet as an inverter-controlled device such as a refrigerator, microwave oven, or air conditioner, or a device that contains an electric motor. Depending on how the other device is used, power supply noise could cause this device to malfunction or produce noise. If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, please connect this device via a power supply noise filter.
307
• Before you make connections, you must switch off the power on all devices to prevent malfunction and/or speaker damage.
308
• Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the Power switch is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the Power switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cord’s plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible.
Location
351
• If this device is placed near devices that contain large transformers, such as power amps, hum may be induced in this device. If this occurs, move this device farther away or change its orientation.
352a
• If this device is operated near a television or radio, color distortion may be seen in the television screen or noise may be heard from the radio. If this occurs, move this device farther away.
352b
• Keep your cell phone powered off or at a sufficient distance from this device. If a cell phone is nearby, noise may be heard when a call is received or initiated, or during conversation.
354b
• Do not leave this device in direct sunlight, near devices that produce heat, or in a closed-up automobile. Do not allow illumination devices operated in close proximity (such as a piano light) or powerful spotlights to shine on the same location on this device for an extended time. This can cause deformation or color change.
355b
• If you move this device between locations of radically different temperature or humidity, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the device. Using the device in this condition will cause malfunctions, so please allow several hours for the condensation to disappear before you use the device.
356
• Do not allow items made of rubber or vinyl to remain on top of this device for an extended time. This can cause deformation or color change.
358
• Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard or pedal board. This can be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce sound.
359
• Do not affix adhesive labels to this device. The exterior finish may be damaged when you remove the labels.
360
• Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on which you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor or mar the surface.You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to prevent this from happening. If you do so, please make sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally.
Care
401b
• For everyday care, wipe with a soft dry cloth, or remove stubborn dirt using a tightly wrung-out cloth. If this device contains wooden components, wipe the entire area following the direction of the grain. The finish may be damaged if you continue strongly rubbing a single location.
6
Addition
• If water droplets should adhere to this device, immediately wipe them off using a soft dry cloth.
402
• Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, or alcohol, since these can cause deformation or color change.
Servicing
452
• If you return this device for servicing, the contents of memory may be lost. Please store important contents on USB memory, or make a note of the contents. We take utmost care to preserve the contents of memory when performing service, but there may be cases when the stored content cannot be recovered because the memory section has malfunctioned.
Please be aware that we cannot accept responsibility for the recovery of lost memory content or for any consequences of such loss.
Other Cautions
551
• Stored content may be lost due to a malfunction of the device or because of inadvertent operation. You should back up important content on USB memory as a safeguard against such loss.
552
• We cannot accept responsibility for the recovery of any content lost from internal memory or USB memory, or for the consequences of such loss.
553
• Do not apply excessive force to the buttons, knobs, or input/ output jacks, since this may cause malfunctions.
554
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
555
• A small amount of noise may be heard from the display during normal operation.
556
• When connecting or disconnecting cables, grasp the plug (not the cable) to prevent short circuits or broken connections.
557
• This device may produce a certain amount of heat, but this is not a malfunction.
558a
• Please enjoy your music in ways that do not inconvenience other people nearby, and pay particular attention to the volume at nighttime. Using headphones will allow you to enjoy music without having to be concerned about others.
559b
• When transporting or shipping this device, package it in an appropriate amount of cushioning material. Scratches, damage, or malfunctions may occur if you transport it without appropriate packaging.
560
• If using the music rest, do not apply excessive force to it.
562
• Some connection cables contain a resistor. Do not connect such cables to this device. Doing so may make the volume extremely low or inaudible. Please use connection cables not containing a resistor.
565
• Before opening or closing the keyboard lid, always make sure that no pets or other small animals are located on top of the instrument (in particular, they should be kept away from the keyboard and its lid). Otherwise, due to the structural design of this instrument, small pets or other animals could end up getting trapped inside it. If such a situation is encountered, you must immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the outlet. You should then consult with the retailer from whom the instrument was purchased, or contact the nearest Roland Service Center.
566b
• The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit. If it does not function as you expect, adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness of your location.
AT-500_e.book 7 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Add
• In order to provide the highest possible image quality, the
ATELIER uses a TFT liquid crystal display. Due to the nature of a TFT liquid crystal display, the screen may contain pixels that fail to light or that remain constantly lit, but please be aware that this is not a malfunction or defect.
Floppy Disk Handling
(Using Optional Floppy Disk Drive)
651
• Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity, please observe the following when handling floppy disks:
• Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
• Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas.
• Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes
(e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle).
Recommended temperature range: 10–50 degrees C
(50–122 degrees F).
• Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as those generated by loudspeakers.
652
• Floppy disks have a “write protect” tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk.
fig.DiskProtect.e.eps
Rear side of the disk
Write
(can write new data onto disk)
Write Protect Tab
Protect
(prevents writing to disk)
653
• The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk.
Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk.
654
• Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By using a dirty or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction.
USB Memory Handling
704
• When connecting USB memory, firmly insert it all the way in.
705
• Do not touch the pins of the USB memory connector, or allow them to become dirty.
708
• USB memory is made using high-precision electronic components, so please observe the following points when handling it.
• To prevent damage from static electrical charges, discharge any static electricity that might be present in your body before handling USB memory.
• Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or any metal object.
• Do not bend or drop USB memory, or subject it to strong impact.
• Do not leave USB memory in direct sunlight or in locations such as a closed-up automobile. (Storage temperature: 0–50 degrees C)
• Do not allow USB memory to become wet.
• Do not disassemble or modify USB memory.
Important Notes
Addition
• When connecting USB memory, position it horizontally with the external memory connector and insert it without using excessive force. The external memory connector may be damaged if you use excessive force when inserting USB memory.
Addition
• Do not insert anything other than USB memory (e.g., wire, coins, other types of device) into the external memory connector. Doing so will damage the external memory connector.
Addition
• Do not apply excessive force to the connected USB memory.
Addition
• If you will not be using USB memory for an extended period of time, close the USB memory cover.
988
• Security Slot (
http://www.kensington.com/
Handling the CDs (CD-ROMs)
Add
• When handling the discs, please observe the following.
• Do not touch the encoded surface of the disc.
• Do not use in dusty areas.
• Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed vehicle.
801
• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be read properly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner.
Add
• Keep the disc in the case.
Add
• Do not keep the disc in the CD drive for a long time.
Add
• Do not put a sticker on the label of the disc.
Add
• Wipe the disc with a soft and dry cloth radially from inside to outside. Do not wipe along circumference.
Add
• Do not use benzine, record cleaner spray or solvents of any kind.
Add
• Do not bend the disc. Bending discs may prevent proper reading and writing of data, and may further result in malfunction.
Copyright
852
• This product can be used to record or duplicate audio or visual material without being limited by certain technological copy-protection measures. This is due to the fact that this product is intended to be used for the purpose of producing original music or video material, and is therefore designed so that material that does not infringe copyrights belonging to others (for example, your own original works) can be recorded or duplicated freely.
853
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through your use of this unit.
7
AT-500_e.book 8 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Main Features
We want to take a moment to thank you for your purchase of the Roland Organ “Music ATELIER.” The ATELIER is an electronic organ which provides a generous collection of rich organ sounds. In addition, it is designed to be easy to learn and use. In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come, please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety.
* The AT-500 is abbreviated in this manual as “ATELIER” respectively.
Basic Concepts of the ATELIER Series
A full complement of organ sounds
A wide range of basic organ sounds, ranging from jazz organ and pipe organ to theatre organ, are onboard so you are sure to enjoy having access to all the sounds you expect from an organ.
Panel layout based on a tradition of emphasis on realtime operation
Based on the idea that you should be able to sit down and begin playing immediately, the operation buttons of the panel are arranged by function as dictated by classic organ traditions, ensuring easy and intuitive operation. All models of the ATELIER series feature the same operability, allowing you to start playing immediately even if you switch models.
High-quality sounds that you can use without editing
In addition to a full range of organ sounds, high-quality sounds such as strings and brass are also included onboard.
You can simply select sounds and enjoy playing the organ—no need to perform complicated editing operations.
Expansive lower keyboard with damper pedal for piano-like expressiveness
The piano is indispensable to contemporary music performance. All models of the ATELIER series contain high-quality grand piano sounds that you will enjoy performing. In addition, the range of the lower keyboard has been expanded, giving you greater expressive capabilities on the piano. A damper pedal and initial touch sensitivity are also provided, both necessities for piano performance.
Design utilizes your existing music data
The ATELIER series is designed so that even on new models, you will feel right at home and can begin playing immediately. Consideration has been given to data compatibility, and existing song data or Registration data can be moved to USB memory or used by connecting a floppy disk drive.
Music styles from around the world
Many of the best-loved musical styles from around the world (Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment patterns) are built in, allowing you to enjoy an international range of performances.
Utilizes SMF music files
Compatible with General MIDI 2, the world standard in SMF music files. Since an external memory connector is provided, you can connect separately available USB memory or a floppy disk drive and take advantage of the wide range of commercially available SMF music files. You can also mute parts, allowing you to practice the part for each hand separately, and enjoy performing ensemble with the music files.
8
AT-500_e.book 9 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Main Features
Features
Harmonic bars for creating organ sounds
The organ is equipped with “Harmonic bars,” which are much like the controllers used on traditional jazz organs. By operating the harmonic bars, you can easily create a diverse variety of organ sounds.
By using the solo harmonic bars you can add orchestral sounds to the organ sounds for even more expressive performance potential.
USB Memory
You can connect separately sold USB memory or a floppy disk drive, and play back SMF music files.
Performances you record or Registration data you create can also be saved on USB memory or a floppy disk, or you can save SMF music files or Registrations from USB memory or a floppy disk into internal user memory.
“Quick Registration” and “Music Assistant” functions
The “Quick Registration” function lets you use keywords to select wonderful Registrations created by top-ranking organists such as Hector Olivera. The “Music Assistant” function makes it easy to recall appropriate Rhythm and sound settings simply by selecting a desired atmosphere for your song.
Highly realistic Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment functions
All Rhythms use data from performances by professional drummers, featuring high-quality patterns with all the grooves and subtle nuance of the real thing. In addition, you can use Automatic Accompaniments that are perfectly matched to each Rhythm to enjoy the feeling of playing with your own band in the background.
Human voices and phrases
In addition to a full array of organ sounds, the ATELIER series provides human voices such as “Jazz Scat,” and human voice phrases such as “Amen.”
Active Expression sounds
For some of the sounds, moving the expression pedal will vary not only the volume but also the tone, or add other sounds. From pianissimo to fortissimo, the tonal character of the sound itself will change as you perform a crescendo, or strings may appear behind the piano, creating dynamic changes in tonality.
Harmony Intelligence
The Harmony Intelligence function automatically adds harmony to the upper keyboard sound according to the chord you play in the lower keyboard. This gives you greater tonal depth and a more powerful performance.
64-note lower keyboard for plenty of range
The 64-note range can be split into zones, allowing a solo voice, pedal bass voice, percussion, etc., to be played independently for an even wider range of performance possibilities. Since the lower keyboard can be divided into a maximum of four parts, you have at your command expressive power that rivals that of a three-manual organ.
In addition, you can use the Drums/SFX function to play drum sounds or sound effects from the entire lower keyboard.
Large, wide LCD
For convenience, the frame area of the wide LCD screen always displays buttons for frequently used functions. You can also view the tempo and measure number in any screen. The color liquid-crystal touch panel ensures excellent visibility and easy operability.
9
AT-500_e.book 10 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Main Features
Conventions Used in This Manual
This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise instructions.
• The AT-500 is abbreviated in this manual as “ATELIER” respectively.
• Button names are enclosed in square brackets (“[ ]”), as in [Drums/SFX] button.
• On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets “< >”, as in <Exit>.
• [
▲
] [
▼
], [ ] [ ] means that you should press one or the other button.
Example: Reverb [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons, Tempo [ ] [ ] buttons.
• For easier readability, some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual screens and colors.
• The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called “touching.”
• An asterisk (*) or a
NOTE
should not be ignored.
at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution. These
• (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.
10
AT-500_e.book 11 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Contents
USING THE UNIT SAFELY........................................................................ 3
Important Notes..................................................................................... 6
Main Features........................................................................................ 8
Panel Descriptions................................................................................ 18
Before You Start Playing ...................................................................... 20
About the Display ................................................................................ 29
Convenient Functions ........................................................................... 33
11
AT-500_e.book 12 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Contents
12
Selecting and Playing Sounds............................................................... 46
Functions of the Upper/Lower/Pedal Bass Sound Select Buttons ................................... 47
Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard (Drums/SFX)................ 66
Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase (Manual Percussion)... 68
Using Rhythm Performance .................................................................. 71
Selecting a Rhythm........................................................................................................... 71
Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard (Sync Start) .76
Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment (Variation).................... 79
A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings (One Touch Program) .................. 84
Using the Registration Buttons .............................................................. 96
How to Recall a Registration (DELAYED) .................................................................... 98
AT-500_e.book 13 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Contents
Using the Performance Functions ........................................................ 117
Applying Various Effects to the Sound ................................................ 125
Making Fine Adjustments to the Rotary Effect Speed (Rotary Speed)............................ 129
Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Produce a Sound Effect................ 142
Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively ................................................. 144
13
AT-500_e.book 14 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Contents
Recording/Playing Back What You Play ............................................. 153
Playing Back Performance Songs Stored on USB Memory and SMF Music Files..................... 156
Editing Your Musical Performance Data .............................................. 179
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms ........................................ 187
Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or USB Memory......................................... 197
14
AT-500_e.book 15 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Contents
Various Other Settings ....................................................................... 198
Choosing the keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will apply........................... 200
Changing the Intro Countdown Sound (Count Down Sound) ...................................... 202
Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Switching Automatically........................................... 203
Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are Recalled .................................. 205
Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled............................. 205
Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs (Playback Transpose)............................ 206
Adjusting the timing of a player piano CD’s piano sound and accompaniment ............ 210
Using the V-LINK function ...................................................................................... 215
Restoring All Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings ............... 219
15
AT-500_e.book 16 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Contents
Connecting with External Device......................................................... 227
Enjoying Music and Video .................................................................. 233
Performing with Sounds that Match the Song
Appendices
16
AT-500_e.book 17 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
MEMO
17
AT-500_e.book 18 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Panel Descriptions
1 2 3
4
8
9
22
23
24
10
11
25
26 27
29
28
30
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
Part Balance [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
Pedal Bass Voice select buttons
→
[Alternate] button
[To Lower] button
→
Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
Lower Voice select buttons
→
Lower Organ Part
Lower Orchestral Part
[Alternate] button
Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
Touch Screen
[Harmony Intelligence] button
Upper Voice select buttons
→
Upper Organ Part
Upper Orchestral Part
[Alternate] button
Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
12
13 14 15 16 17
7.
8.
9.
Solo Voice select buttons
→
Solo Part
[Alternate] button
[To Lower] button
→
Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
[Power On] switch
→
D Beam
→
10.
11.
12.
D Beam buttons
→
Upper Harmonic Bars
→
Solo Harmonic Bars
→
13.
14.
Vintage Organ buttons
→
Percussion buttons
→
15.
16.
[H-Bar Manual] button
→
[Video Monitor] button
→
17.
18.
[Value] dial
→
Pedal Harmonic Bars
→
19.
20.
Lower Harmonic Bars
Transpose [-] [+] buttons
→
18
AT-500_e.book 19 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Panel Descriptions
6
5
7
20 21
18 19
21.
22.
23.
24.
Composer
[Song] button
[Registration] button
→
[Demo] button
→
[Reset] button
[Play/Stop] button
[Rec] button
→
[Drums/SFX] button
→
[Manual Percussion] button
→
Rhythm select buttons
→
Tempo [ ] [ ] buttons
→
Fill In [Auto] button
→
Fill In [Break] button
→
Variation buttons
→
[Intro/Ending] button
→
[Count Down] button
→
Arranger [On/Off] button
→
[One Touch Program] button
→
[Sync Start] button
→
[Start/Stop] button
→
25.
26.
[Pedal Sustain] button
→
[Master Volume] slider
→
27.
28.
[Brilliance] slider
→
Pitch Bender/Vibrato lever
→
29.
Rotary Sound
→
[On/Off] button
[Fast/Slow] button
30.
Registration buttons
[Write] button
→
[Manual] button
→
Registration [1]–[8] buttons
→
19
AT-500_e.book 20 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Before You Start Playing
Setting Up the Music Rest
Attaching the Music Rest
1.
Insert the supplied screws for the music rest into the screw holes located on the top of the instrument, and lightly tighten them (two locations).
Screw
Screw
Removing the Music Rest
1.
To remove the music rest, support it with one hand while loosening the screws.
2.
Remove the music rest.
After removing the music rest, don’t forget to retighten the screws.
Connecting the Speaker Cable
1.
Plug the speaker cable extending from the stand into the Speaker connector located at the rear of the AT-500’s bottom panel.
Pay attention to the shape of the speaker cable’s connector, and insert it until you hear it click securely into place.
2.
Put the music rest between the screws and the
ATELIER’s body.
Organ side
Speaker box side
Speaker Cord
3.
While supporting the music rest with one hand, secure it in place by turning the screws.
When attaching the music rest, support it firmly with one hand to make sure that you don’t drop it. Be careful, so you don’t get your fingers pinched.
NOTE
Do not apply excessive force to the installed music rest.
NOTE
NOTE
Be sure to use the supplied screws for attaching the music rest.
Before moving the organ, be sure to remove the music rest to prevent accidents.
20
AT-500_e.book 21 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Before You Start Playing
Opening/Closing the Lid
fig.00-22.eps
1.
To open the lid, hold it with both hands and slide it to the rear.
2.
To close the lid, slowly pull it forward until it stops.
NOTE
NOTE
Be careful not to get your fingers caught when opening or closing the lid. Adult supervision is recommended when small children are going to be using the instrument.
To prevent accidents, be sure to close the lid before moving the organ.
NOTE
Make sure you don’t have anything (such as sheet music) on the keyboard when you close the lid.
Connecting the Power Cord
1.
First, make sure that the [Power On] switch at the panel’s left side is OFF (not pushed in).
fig. 00-27.eps,fig.00-27-2.eps
Upper position
OFF
2.
Connect the supplied power cord to the AC
Inlet connector, then plug the other end into an
AC outlet.
AC Outlet
Power Cord
NOTE
Only use the power cord supplied with this instrument.
NOTE
Whenever you do not intend to use the instrument for extended periods of time, pull out the power cord from the
AC outlet.
21
AT-500_e.book 22 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Before You Start Playing
941
Turning the Power On and Off
NOTE
Once the connections have been completed, turn on or off power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning on or off devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
Turning On the Power
1.
Make sure of the following before the power is turned on.
• Is the power cord correctly connected to the AC inlet?
• Is the power cord correctly connected to the AC outlet?
• Is the [Master Volume] slider (located at the left of the
Lower Keyboard) set to the Min (minimum) position?
fig.00-26.eps
2.
Press the [Power On] switch to turn on the power.
fig. 00-27.eps, fig.00-27-3.eps
Lower position
ON
The main screen will appear in the display.
Main Screen
3.
Adjust the volume to an appropriate level by moving the [Master Volume] slider or operating the expression pedal.
Now adjust the [Master Volume] slider to a suitable level. The volume will be increased when the Expression
Pedal is pressed down, and decreased when the pedal is returned.
fig.00-28.eps
increase the volume decrease the volume decrease the volume increase the volume
Turning Off the Power
1.
Before switching the power off, set the [Master
Volume] slider to the Min (minimum) position.
2.
Press the [Power On] switch to turn off the power.
fig. 00-27.eps,fig.00-27-2.eps
Upper position
OFF
945
NOTE
If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the
[Power On] switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Refer to “Power Supply” (p. 6).
942
NOTE
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally.
22
AT-500_e.book 23 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Before You Start Playing
Using Headphones
The ATELIER features Phones jacks. These allow you to play without having to worry about bothering others around you, even at night.
fig.00-29.eps
Using a Microphone
Since this instrument has a Mic jack, you can use a microphone to enjoy a variety of possibilities such as singing along with your performance, or singing along with SMF music files (sold separately).
fig.00-32.eps
1.
Connect your headphones to the [Phones] jack underneath the left side of the keyboard.
The sound from the built-in speakers stops.
Now, sound is heard only through the headphones.
2.
Adjust the headphones volume with the
[Master Volume] slider and Expression pedal.
Some Notes on Using Headphones
fifig.00-31.eps
• To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones only by the headset or the plug.
• Headphones may be damaged if the volume is too high when they are plugged in. Lower the volume on the
ATELIER before plugging in headphones.
• To prevent possible auditory damage, loss of hearing, or damage to the headphones, the headphones should not be used at an excessively high volume. Use the headphones at a moderate volume level.
• Accepts connection of Stereo headphones.
• If plugs of the headphones are plugged into the [Phones] jack, no sound will be heard from the ATELIER’s speakers.
1.
Connect your microphone to the [Mic] jack underneath the left side of the keyboard.
2.
Use the [Mic Volume] knob to adjust the volume level for the microphone.
You can adjust the depth of the echo applied to sound from
The microphone must be purchased separately. When purchasing a microphone, please consult the vender where you bought the ATELIER.
Some Notes on Using a Microphone
fig.00-31.eps
• To avoid disturbing others, be careful of the volume level when playing late at night or very early in the morning.
• When connecting a microphone to the ATELIER, be sure to lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by the speakers.
• Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:
• Changing the orientation of the microphone.
• Relocating the microphone so it is farther from the speakers.
• Lowering volume levels.
23
AT-500_e.book 24 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Before You Start Playing
Using the Cord Hook
If you’re using headphones or a microphone, you can use the cord hook to neatly bundle the cables near your feet.
Attaching the Cord Hook
1.
Screw the cord hook (with wing nut) about
80% of the way into the screw hole located at the bottom left of the organ.
2.
After you’ve oriented the hook as desired, use the wing nut to fasten it.
Restoring All the Factory
Default Settings
You can restore all of the settings stored in the ATELIER to what they were when the instrument shipped from the factory. This function is called “Factory Reset.”
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
fig.00-37.eps
Screw Hole
Wing Nut
Cord Hook
2.
In the System screen, touch <Utility> to open the Utility screen.
fig.00-38.eps
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Factory Reset>.
fig.00-39.eps
24
AT-500_e.book 25 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Before You Start Playing
The confirmation message appears on screen.
fig.00-40-1.eps
You can also use the following method to return to the factory-set condition.
Method 1
1.
Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen, to display the Quick Guide screen.
2.
Press the [One Touch Program] button.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
fig.00-40-1.eps
If you touch <Cancel>, the Factory Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the System screen.
4.
When you touch <OK>, the Factory Reset operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.
NOTE
Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!
fig.00-40-2.eps
NOTE
NOTE
Loading factory default settings will erase any Registrations currently in the memory of the ATELIER. To save the
Registrations you are currently using, refer to “Saving
If you want to restore settings other than those for User
Memory (p. 72) to the factory-set condition, touch <Panel
Reset> in the System Utility screen. If you want to restore only the user memory to the factory-set condition, refer to
If you touch <Cancel>, the Factory Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the Main screen.
3.
When you touch <OK>, the Factory Reset operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.
Method 2
1.
Turn down the volume to the minimum level, then turn off the power.
2.
While holding down the [One Touch
Program] button, press the [Power On] switch to turn the power on.
fig.00-41.eps
The following screen appears.
fig.00-40-3.eps
25
AT-500_e.book 26 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Before You Start Playing
Using the External Memory
Songs you record on the ATELIER and Registration sets you create can be copied to separately available USB memory for safekeeping. You can also copy songs to a floppy disk using a
separately sold floppy disk drive (p. 87, p. 114, p. 177).
You can also play back SMF music files saved on USB
memory or a floppy disk (p. 156).
NOTE
Use USB memory and floppy disk drive available from
Roland. Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if other USB device is used.
Connecting the USB Memory
1.
Connect the USB memory to the External
Memory connector.
Rotating the External Memory
Connector Holder
The External Memory connector holder rotates 90 degrees left and right. Rotating the External Memory connector holder allows you to avoid damaging the connected external memory if something happens to bump against it.
1.
Grasp the External Memory connector holder and turn it 90 degrees to the left or right.
External Memory
Holder
931
Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in—until it is firmly in place.
If you’re using new USB memory or floppy disk, you’ll need to initialize (format) it on the ATELIER. For details, refer to
“Formatting a USB Memory (Format)” (p. 220).
90 degrees to the left
90 degrees to the right
Security Slot
NOTE
Be sure to grasp the External Memory connector holder itself when rotating it. Never rotate the External Memory connector holder by holding the connected external memory.
NOTE
Take care not to allow your fingers to become pinched when rotating the External Memory connector holder.
988
Security Slot ( ) http://www.kensington.com/
26
AT-500_e.book 27 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Connecting the Floppy Disk Drive
Attach the floppy disk drive as shown the figure, using the mounting holes on the ATELIER’s bottom panel.
For details of the attachment, refer to the owner’s manual of the floppy disk drive.
Before You Start Playing
1.
Connect the USB cable of the floppy disk drive to the ATELIER’s Ext Drive connector.
Ext Drive
Connector
USB Cable
27
AT-500_e.book 28 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Before You Start Playing
Using a CD
You can play back audio CDs and CD-ROMs containing saved SMF music files.
You can also play songs on VIMA CD-ROMs (VIMA TUNES) sold by Roland.
Precautions Concerning Use of the CD
• The ATELIER is capable of playing back only commercial
CDs that conform the official standards-those that carry the “COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO” logo.
• The usability and sound quality of audio discs that incorporate copyright protection technology and other non-standard CDs cannot be guaranteed.
• For more detailed information on audio discs featuring copyright protection technology and other non-standard
CDs, please consult the disc vendor.
• You cannot save songs to CDs, and you cannot delete songs recorded to CDs. Furthermore, you cannot format
CDs.
Connecting a CD Drive
NOTE
CD drives that draw their power from the USB connector cannot be used.
Ext Drive
Connector
1.
USB Cable
Switch off the power to the ATELIER and the CD drive to be connected.
2.
Connect the USB cable included with the CD drive to the Ext Drive connector on the
ATELIER.
3.
Turn on the power to the ATELIER.
4.
Turn on the power to the connected CD drive.
NOTE
For information on how to perform the following CD-drive operations, refer to the owner’s manual for the drive.
• Switching the power on and off
• Inserting and ejecting a CD
A list of the CD drives that have been tested and found to be compatible is available on the Roland website.
http://www.roland.com/
28
AT-500_e.book 29 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
About the Display
The ATELIER makes use of a Touch Screen.
This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by touching the screen lightly.
Understanding the Main and Related Screens
Main Screen
fig.00-06-a.eps
1
2
3 4 12
5
7
8
13
6
14
15
16
17
9 10 11
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Bouncing Ball
A ball will bounce in time with the Rhythm or song.
Beat
Transpose
Displays the keyboard transposition setting.
Chord Name
Displays the name of the chord that is played in the lower keyboard.
Indication button
Pressed to choose which name to have indicated; either the Rhythm Name,
Song Name, or Registration Name.
The name of the Rhythm will appear in the screen when you turn on the power. You can change this indication to the song name or the Registration name.
Rhythm Name/Song Name/Registration Name
Quick Registration
Press this when you want to use the Quick Registration function (p. 35).
Music Assistant
Press this when you want to use the Music Assistant function (p. 37).
985
NOTE
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system (e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual.
NOTE
The Touch Screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger. Pressing hard, or using a hard object can damage the
Touch Screen. Be careful not to press too hard, and be sure to use only your fingers to operate the Touch Screen.
NOTE
The positioning of the Touch
Screen may become displaced due to changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If this happens, follow the steps in
Screen” (p. 217) to correct the
pointer position.
NOTE
Do not place items on the touch screen.
You can make settings so that the bouncing ball is not shown
and change the background of
29
AT-500_e.book 30 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
About the Display
Number
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Description
Rhythm
You can play Rhythms from this instrument, or play or store Rhythms from
USB memory or user memory. Rhythm-related settings can also be made here.
System
Make various settings.
Quick Guide
Displays the Quick Guide screen.
While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, you can press the keyboard, a
button, or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen (p. 41).
Tempo
Measure
Sound/KBD (Sound/Keyboard)
Select a voice (tone), or make settings for the effect depth, keyboard, etc.
Rec/Play
Play back or record a song. You can also view a notation display while a song plays.
Registration
Load Registrations from user memory into internal memory, or save
Registrations. Registration-related settings can also be made here.
Main
Returns you to the main screen if any screen other than the main screen is open.
Tempo, measure number,
<Sound/KBD>, <Rec/Play>,
<Registration>, and <Main> are always shown in the right side of the screen.
This icon is displayed when the V-LINK function is on.
➝
This icon is shown for SMF music files.
This icon is displayed when any portion of the recorded song has been altered. This icon is also shown if you’ve recorded a song but not yet saved it.
30
AT-500_e.book 31 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
About the Display
About the Icons
fig.09-08.eps, fig.03-05.eps
You can return directly to the main screen by touching
<Main> shown in the right side of the screen.
Button Meaning
Depending on the function, some screens are spread over multiple pages.
You can touch < > < > < > < the next or previous page of the screen.
> to display
In the Load screen, Save screen, or File Edit screen, you can select a file by touching < > < >.
Touch this when you want to exit (close) the currently displayed screen.
This icon is shown for Active Expression voice.
➝
Active Expression Voice (p. 59)
This icon is shown for EX voice.
➝
Sub-windows
When you touch <Utility> or the like in a screen, a screen like the following will appear. This type of screen is called a “sub-window.” fig.00-38.eps
When you touch a menu in the sub-window, the sub-window will close, and the selected menu screen will appear.
In a sub-window, touch <Exit> to exit the sub-window.
31
AT-500_e.book 32 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
About the Display
Sub-windows for Setting Values
When you are making settings in the System screen, the following type of screen appears.
Return to the factory settings.
Modify the value.
fig.09-09.eps
If a sub-window for you to edit the settings is shown, you can use the [Value] dial to switch the settings.
About the [Value] Dial
The ATELIER has a [Value] dial.
You can use the [Value] dial to change the tempo or edit the settings, or to select a file in screens such as the File Edit screen.
Editing the value of a setting (when a sub-window for editing the value is open)
Switching files (when the File Edit screen, Save screen, or Load screen for
Rhythms, songs, or Registrations is open)
32
AT-500_e.book 33 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Convenient Functions
Listening to the Demo Songs
The ATELIER provides demo songs. Here’s how to play the Demo songs, and fully appreciate the sounds, Rhythms, and Automatic Accompaniment that are available with the ATELIER.
fig.01-01.eps
For details on the composer of each demo song and their
1.
fig.01-03.eps
Press the [Demo] button to make the indicator light.
The Demo Screen appears.
2.
fig.01-03.eps
Touch < > or < > on screen to select the demo song.
3.
Touch < > to start playback of the demo song.
When the selected demo song ends, the next demo song will begin playing.
You can play/stop the demo songs by pressing the panel
[Play/Stop] button.
33
AT-500_e.book 34 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Convenient Functions
4.
Touch < > once again to stop playback of the demo song.
5.
Press the [Demo] button to exit the demonstration screen.
If the following screen appears
If the performance song in the unit has not been saved to the
“Favorites” (User memory) or USB memory, the following message appears, and it will not be possible to play the Demo songs.
fig.E-62.eps
The performance data can be saved on the “Favorites” (User memory) or USB memory. If you wish to save the performance data to the “Favorites” or USB
If you do not want to delete the performance data, touch
<Cancel>.
1.
If you want to delete the performance data, touch <OK>.
NOTE
All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws.
NOTE
The data for the Demo song that is being played is not available at the MIDI Out connector.
34
AT-500_e.book 35 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Convenient Functions
Choose a Keyword for Quick Registration Selection
You can select a voice appropriate for your performance by selecting from keywords representing your situation, location, musical genre, etc. You can call up Registrations created by top-level organists, and refer to them for hints on how to select and layer sounds when creating your own Registrations.
1.
fig.00-06.eps
Touch <Quick Registration> on the Main screen.
If another screen is open, touch
<Main> to access the main screen.
fig.03-32.eps
The Quick Registration screen appears.
2.
fig.03-32.eps
Touch a button that shows a Quick Registration group.
35
AT-500_e.book 36 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Convenient Functions fig.03-35.eps
A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a Quick Registration group.
3.
In the sub-window, touch a Quick Registration group name to select the desired Quick Registration group.
The sub-window closes, and the Quick Registration screen returns to the display.
4.
fig.03-32.eps
Touch <Upper>, <Lower>, or <Pedal>, switching the respective button’s indicator on or off, to select the keyboard to which the voice is to be assigned.
Upper
Lower
Pedal
Setting Keyboard for which you select a voice
Upper keyboard
Lower keyboard
Pedalboard
5.
Touch < > < > to switch pages, and touch the desired keyword.
The voice will be assigned to the selected keyboard.
If you want to continue changing the voice settings, repeat steps 2--5.
36
AT-500_e.book 37 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Convenient Functions
Music Assistant Function
A collection of the world’s best, most well-known songs were carefully selected, then the optimum panel settings for each of them were determined, and the resulting data was stored inside the instrument.
Simply select the keyword that most closely suggests the character of the song you have in mind, and a Rhythm performance, a sound for the melody, and other selections will be made for you. Once you’ve selected a keyword, all you have to do is play the keyboard to start performing.
1.
fig.00-06.eps
Touch <Music Assistant> on the Main screen.
If another screen is open, touch
<Main> to access the main screen.
fig.00-18.eps
The Music Assistant screen appears.
37
AT-500_e.book 38 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Convenient Functions
2.
fig.00-19.eps
Touch < > < > to switch screens, and touch a keyword appropriate for the character of the song.
You can also switch screens by using the [Value] dial.
The Registration [1]–[4] buttons flash.
Panel settings appropriate for the keyword will automatically be called up for the Registration [1]–[4] buttons.
3.
On the Lower keyboard, play a chord.
At the moment you play the keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then the
Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play.
4.
Press a Registration button from [1] through [4] to switch the panel settings.
5.
Press the [Intro/Ending] or [Start/Stop] button to stop the
Rhythm.
6.
To end the Music Assistant function, press the [One Touch
Program] button, extinguishing its indicator.
38
AT-500_e.book 39 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Convenient Functions
Music Assistant Search
You can specify a song name and other search terms and use these for a
Music Assistant search.
1.
Touch <Music Assistant> on the Main screen.
The Music Assistant screen appears.
fig.00-18.eps
If another screen is open, touch
<Main> to access the main screen.
2.
fig.00-19-2.eps
Touch <Search>.
A sub-window appears.
Searching by Music Assistant Name
3.
fig.00-19-3.eps
Touch <By Name>.
39
AT-500_e.book 40 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Convenient Functions
4.
Decide which character you will use for the search.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”
→
“B”
→
“C”...).
Touch <ABC/123> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
5.
Touch <Start> (Start Search).
The results of the search appear in the display.
To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen.
6.
Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Music Assistant screen.
Searching by Conditions
3.
Touch <By Conditions>.
You can use four different criteria in searches: “Tempo,” “Rhythm,” “Genre,” and “Scene.” fig.00-19-4.eps
4.
5.
6.
7.
Touch the value for the search term.
Touch < > < > to adjust the settings.
Touch <Exit>.
Touch <Start> (Start Search).
The results of the search appear in the display.
To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen.
8.
Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Music Assistant screen.
40
If you don’t need to specify any search conditions, choose
“Any.”
AT-500_e.book 41 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Convenient Functions
About the Quick Guide Function
The ATELIER offers a Quick Guide function, which makes it easy for you to access various functions. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, you can press the keyboard, a button, or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen.
1.
Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen.
The following Quick Guide screen appears.
fig.00-13.eps
If another screen is open, touch
<Main> to access the main screen.
2.
While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, press a button, keyboard, pedal, or foot switch.
You will be taken to the screen that contains settings related to the button, keyboard, pedal, or foot switch that you pressed.
3.
4.
Make settings in the screen to which you jumped.
When you are finished making settings, touch <Exit> to close the screen.
For more on keys, buttons, and controllers that can be used with the Quick Guide function,
41
AT-500_e.book 42 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Convenient Functions
About the Index Menu
In the Quick Guide screen, you can touch <Index> to access the Index Menu.
In the Index Menu screen, you can touch a keyword to jump to the setting screen for that keyword.
1.
Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen.
The following Quick Guide screen appears.
fig.00-13.eps
2.
Touch <Index>.
The following screen appears.
fig.00-14.eps
3.
fig.00-15.eps
Touch a letter of the alphabet to select the first letter of the desired keyword.
42
AT-500_e.book 43 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分 fig.00-16.eps
The Quick Guide Index screen appears, and the keywords will be displayed.
Convenient Functions
4.
fig.00-16.eps
Touch the desired keyword.
The setting screen for the specified keyword appears.
5.
6.
Make settings in the setting screen that appeared.
Touch <Exit>.
43
AT-500_e.book 44 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Convenient Functions
\
Creating a Folder
You can create folders in a connected USB memory device or in user memory
(Favorites).
If you want to create a folder in USB memory, connect the USB memory to the external memory connector.
About folders
The ATELIER lets you create up to 99 Registration sets or songs. If you create a folder, you’ll be able to save up to 99 Registration sets or songs in each folder.
You can create as many folders as you wish, limited only by the capacity of the media.
It’s a good idea to save the Registrations in a folder for each song.
NOTE
You can’t create a folder on a floppy disk.
1.
fig.03-05.eps
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The Registration Load screen appears.
2.
fig.03-25.eps
Touch <File>.
The Registration File Edit screen appears.
44
AT-500_e.book 45 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
3.
4.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
Choose “Ext Memory” if you want to create a folder on USB memory or “User” if you want to create a folder user memory.
Touch <Create>.
A screen will appear, allowing you to specify a name for the new folder.
Convenient Functions
5.
6.
Assign a name to the folder.
Touch the screen to specify the desired characters.
Rename the folder as described in “Assigning a Name to a Registration Set”
When you’ve finished, touch <OK>.
A new folder with the name you assigned will be created.
Creating a folder in the Rec/Play (record/playback) screen
Here’s how to create a folder in the Rec/Play (record/playback) screen.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Song Select>.
The Song Select screen appears.
4.
Touch <File Edit>.
The Song File Edit screen appears.
5.
Touch < > < > to select the media.
Choose “Favorites” if you want to create a folder in “Favorites” or
“Ext Memory” if you want to create a folder in USB memory.
6.
Carry out steps 4 through 6 of “Creating a Folder” (p. 45).
NOTE
Only lowercase letters and the
_ (underscore) character can be used in a folder name.
NOTE
You can’t create a folder that
already-existing folder.
45
AT-500_e.book 46 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Selecting Voices
You can play the sounds of various instruments on the ATELIER. These sounds are called “Voices.”
About the Voices and Parts
The ATELIER has two manual keyboards and a pedalboard.
From top to bottom these are called the “Upper Keyboard,” “Lower
Keyboard,” and “Pedalboard.” fig.01-05-2.eps
Upper Keyboard
Lower Keyboard
46
Pedalboard
Three parts, “Organ,” “Orchestral” and “Vintage Organ” are assigned to the
Upper and Lower keyboards, respectively, and you can select one voice from each part. Plus, with the addition of the “Solo” part voice, you can have up to Four voices playing simultaneously (the Solo voice can be played in either the Upper or Lower keyboard).
The Pedalboard has two parts: “Pedal” and “Vintage Organ.” You can select one voice for each part, meaning that it is possible to play up to two voices simultaneously.
Keyboard
Upper Keyboard
Lower Keyboard
Pedalboard
Parts
Upper Organ
Upper Orchestral
Upper Vintage
Solo
(This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower] button be extinguished)
Lower Organ
Lower Orchestral
Lower Vintage
Solo
(This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower] button lights up)
Pedal
Pedal Vintage
To play a Solo voice on the
Lower keyboard, select the Solo voice and press the Solo [To
If you want to play the pedal bass voice in the lower keyboard, set “Bass Split” to
AT-500_e.book 47 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Functions of the Upper/Lower/Pedal Bass Sound Select Buttons
fig.01-06.eps
Each time you press a voice button, its indicator will switch between being lit and being turned off. Voices that have their button indicator lit can be played.
Two voices of the same family are assigned to each voice button. Buttons with voices from two different families have the names of both voices printed on them.
The [Alternate] button switches between these two voices.
[Alternate] button
Lit
Unlit
Voice that will be selected
The voice indicated on the button is selected.
Another voice of the same category as the voice shown on the button will be selected.
For buttons to which voices of the same category are not assigned, the voice printed below the button will be selected.
NOTE
No sounds are produced, even when the keys are played, when the Voice button is unlit and all vintage organ voices are off.
47
AT-500_e.book 48 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices
Press the “Organ” or “Orchestral” buttons for each Keyboard (Upper/Lower) to select the desired voice.
When the power is turned on, the Upper keyboard will play “Full Organ1” and the Lower keyboard will play “Lower Organ3.”
Example: Selecting “ComboJazzOrg” for the Upper Organ and
“Grand Piano” for the Upper Orchestral.
1.
Press the Upper Organ [Jazz] button (indicator lights).
The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.
fig.01-08.eps
The lower voice can be selected in the same way as the upper voice.
Now when you play the Upper keyboard, the “Jazz Organ2” will sound.
2.
Press the Upper Organ [Alternate] button (the indicator lights).
When you play the Upper keyboard, the “ComboJazzOrg” will sound.
Each time you press the [Alternate] button you will switch between the two voices which are assigned the button.
3.
Press the Upper Orchestral [Piano] button (the indicator lights).
When you play the Upper keyboard, “Grand Piano” will be added, producing a mixture of two different voices.
48
AT-500_e.book 49 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting Pedal Bass Voice
Press the buttons of the various parts of “Pedal” to select voices.
Immediately after the power is turned on, the Pedal Bass voice will sound single notes using the “Organ Bass1” voice.
fig.01-09.eps
Example: Select “Str.Bass Pdl” for the Pedal part
1
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Normally, playing the pedalboard will sound one note at a time. Settings can be adjusted to allow multiple notes to be played on the Pedalboard
1.
Press the Pedal [String] button (indicator lights).
The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.
fig.01-10.eps
If you press the Pedal [To
Lower] button (indicator lights) or “Bass Split” is “ON,” the
Pedal Bass voice can now be played by the Lower keyboard, not by the Pedalboard.
For details refer to “Using the
Now when you play the Pedalboard, “Str.Bass Pdl” (String Bass Pedal) will be heard.
49
AT-500_e.book 50 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Selecting Solo Voice
The Solo section of the Upper keyboard is monophonic, that is, the Solo voice will only sound for the highest note played on the Upper keyboard. This allows you to play full chords and have the selected Solo voice playing the highest
(solo) note.
Example: Selecting “Trumpet” for the Solo part
fig.01-11.eps
1
You can use the Solo part’s harmonic bar to adjust the
volume of the Solo part (p. 62).
By pressing the Solo [To Lower] button, you can play the Solo voice from the Lower keyboard.
For details refer to “Playing the
1.
Press the Solo [Trumpet] button (indicator lights).
The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.
fig.01-12.eps
It is possible to change how a
Solo voice will sound.
Normally, the Solo voice will be sounded by the highest note you play on the Upper keyboard, but you can make settings so that the last-played note will sound the Solo voice.
For details, refer to “Changing
Play the Upper keyboard. The selected voice will sound by the highest note played.
When you press the [Alternate] button, the two voices assigned to the button will alternate.
50
AT-500_e.book 51 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Selecting a Voice Using the [Others] Button
Notice that there is an [Others] button for each part. By using the [Others] button, you can select all voices.
As with the other voice buttons, the [Others] button can be assigned two voices. You can use the [Alternate] button to switch between these two voices.
1.
Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice to select ON (lit) or OFF (dark).
The setting of the [Alternate] button: ON (lit) or OFF (dark), determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned.
2.
Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice.
The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds.
fig.01-15.eps
NOTE
When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in the display screen, but the basic screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen.
If you want to change the voice for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the
Others Voice screen appears in the display.
3.
fig.01-15.eps
Touch a button that shows a sound group.
A voice indicated by called an “EX voice.”
These voices are especially recommended.
is
Sounds marked by “ ” support the Active Expression
51
AT-500_e.book 52 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds fig.01-16.eps
A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.
4.
In the sub-window, touch a sound group name to select the desired sound group.
The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.
The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the specified sound group.
fig.01-17.eps
You can touch <AEx Voice> in the Voice Select screen to have only the Active Expression voices be displayed.
“Active Expression voices” can be assigned to the [Others] buttons of the Upper Orchestral part, Lower Orchestral part,
Pedal part, and Solo part.
For more on the active expression voices, refer to
5.
Touch < > < > to switch screens, and touch a voice name to select a voice.
6.
Once again, press the blinking [Others] button to confirm the voice.
The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.
You can also confirm the voice by touching <Exit> in the
Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.
For more information about the voices that can be assigned to an [Others] button, please refer to “Voice List” (Appendix: separate booklet).
52
AT-500_e.book 53 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Creating Organ Sounds (Vintage Organ)
The Vintage Organ button lets you add the vintage organ sounds to the upper, lower, and pedal parts.
In addition, you can also use the harmonic bars to modify the selected sound as desired.
The ATELIER provides nine harmonic bars for the upper part and lower part respectively, and two harmonic bars for the pedal part.
Each harmonic bar is assigned a sound of a different footage (pitch), and by layering these sounds you can create a variety of organ tones.
You can use the Solo part’s harmonic bars to adjust the volume of the Solo part voice.
Harmonic Bar
By sliding the harmonic bars forward or backward (in or out), you can adjust the volume of the various footages.
The volume can be adjusted over nine steps (0–8).
When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way (8), the volume is loudest.
When it is pushed in all the way (0), there will be no sound.
8’ is the footage that forms the basic pitch of the sound; this is the center around which you create the tone.
Each harmonic bar is assigned a sine wave (a pure pitch without overtones) of a different pitch, and by combining these pitches you can create a wide range of sounds.
Time
8' volume: 8
Time
Time
4' volume: 5
53
AT-500_e.book 54 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
What’s the feet?
“Feet” is a term that began as a measurement of the length of the pipes in a pipe organ.
The pipes that produce the basic pitch (fundamental) for each note are considered to be “8 feet” in length.
Therefore, a pipe producing a pitch one octave below that of the reference of 8' (eight feet) would be 16'; for one octave above the reference, the pipe would be 4', and to take the pitch up yet another octave it would be shortened to 2'.
The pitches of the harmonic bars are related as follows.
When the middle C (C4) note is pressed, each harmonic bar will sound the following notes.
16' one octave below
5 1 /
3
'
5th
8' root
4'
8th
2 2 /
3
'
12th
2'
15th
1 3 /
5
' 1 1 /
3
'
17th 19th
1'
22nd
54
8' =
On tonewheel organs, the high-pitched footage for a portion of the high range, and the low-pitched footage for a portion of the low range are
“folded-back” in units of one octave.
Folding back the high-frequency portion prevents the high-frequency sounds from being unpleasantly shrill, and folding back the low-frequency portion prevents the sound from becoming “muddy.”
On the ATELIER faithfully simulates this characteristic.
AT-500_e.book 55 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Playing a Vintage Organ Voice
Turning on Vintage Organ
1.
Press the Vintage Organ [On/Off] button so its indicator is lit.
Each time you press the button, the indicator will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF.
The Vintage organ screen appears.
NOTE
The glide, pitch bend and sustain effects cannot be applied to vintage organ voices.
Modifying the Sound
2.
Slide the harmonic bars that you want to hear.
Slide the harmonic bars to adjust the volume of each footage over a range of nine steps
(0–8) and you can layer the sound of multiple harmonic bars.
Various pitches can be combined for the Lower keyboard in the same way as for the Upper keyboard.
The harmonic bar for the Solo part will adjust the volume of the voice selected for the Solo part. When you move the Solo part’s harmonic bar, the Solo part’s level indicator will also change.
55
AT-500_e.book 56 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Adding Sparkle to the Sound (Percussion)
This adds an attack sound to the beginning of the note, making the sound crisper.
3.
Press the Percussion [4’] button or [2 2/3’] button (indicator lit).
Play the Upper keyboard and notice that an attack has been added.
NOTE
Percussion [4’] and [2 2/3’] buttons cannot be used simultaneously.
Button
Percussion [4’] button
Percussion [2 2/3’] button
Description
Percussion one octave above
Percussion one octave and a fifth above
Adjusting the Rate at which the Percussion Decays
You can shorten the decay time of the percussion sound.
4.
Press the Percussion [Fast Decay] button to switch the indicator between lit/unlit.
NOTE
The Percussion [4’] button and
Percussion [2 2/3’] button are valid only for vintage organ voices of the upper part.
Lit
[Fast Decay] Button
Unlit
Description
The percussion sound will disappear quickly.
The percussion will have a sharper attack.
The percussion sound will disappear slowly.
The percussion will have a more gentle attack.
56
AT-500_e.book 57 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Using the Harmonic Bar Settings of the Panel
If you’ve edited the harmonic bar settings in the screen, or if you’ve switched
Registrations so that the Vintage Organ settings have changed, you can switch the Vintage Organ settings to the positions (settings) of the harmonic
1.
Press the [H-Bar Manual] button.
When you press the Vintage Organ button, a vintage organ screen like the following will appear.
Vintage Organ Screen
fig.01-24.eps
When you touch the Vintage
Organ screen and then change the settings, the screen is held in that condition.
The screen will show the harmonic bars.
By touching the harmonic bars and sliding them, you can adjust the volume of each footage. The volume can be adjusted over nine steps (0–8).
When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way (8), the volume is loudest.
When it is pushed in all the way (0), there will be no sound.
Icon
Vib (Vibrato)
Cho (Chorus)
Description
Adds a vibrato effect to the sound.
Adds a chorus effect to the sound.
U/L/P
Hold
Touching
< >
cycles you through the available choices, which are: Upper Vintage screen, Lower Vintage screen, and Pedal Vintage screen.
The Vintage Organ screen will automatically close after it has been displayed for several seconds. If you touch <Hold>, the screen will remain displayed until you touch <Hold> once again.
By touching the screen and sliding your fingertip to the left or right (horizontally), you can adjust the volume of all harmonic bars.
NOTE
It is not possible to apply both vibrato and chorus simultaneously.
57
AT-500_e.book 58 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Adjusting the Volume of the Vintage
Organ
You can adjust the overall volume of the sound to regulate the volume balance relative to the other sounds.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08.eps
3.
Touch < > < > to display the
VintageOrganVolume.
fig.05-12-2.eps
4.
Touch the value setting buttons for
VintageOrganVolume to adjust the setting.
fig.05-12-2.eps
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.VoiceList.eps
2.
Touch <Effect>.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.05-17.eps
5.
Touch < > < > to edit the value.
Setting
1–12
6.
Touch <Exit>.
58
AT-500_e.book 59 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Performing with an Active Expression Voice
For “Active Expression Voices,” operating the expression pedal will control not only the volume but also the tone, or may add additional sounds.
1.
Touch the [Others] button of the Part to which you want to assign an Active Expression voice.
The Others Voice screens appears. “Active Expression voices” can be assigned to the [Others] buttons of the Upper Orchestral part, Lower
Orchestral part, Pedal, and Solo part.
2.
Touch a button that shows a sound group.
A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.
3.
In the sub-window, touch <AEx Voice> (Active Expression
Voice).
fig.01-16.eps
For details on the active expression voices that are available, refer to “Voice list”
(Appendix: separate booklet).
NOTE
Although you can select an
Active Expression voice with the
[Others] button for parts other than Lower Orchestral, Upper
Orchestral, Pedal and Solo, no
Active Expression effect is applied. The (Active
Expression) icon does not appear when an Active
Expression voice is selected for a part for which the Active
Expression effect is not being used.
fig.01-44.eps
The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.
The Others Voice (Others Voice Select) screen appears, and only the Active
Expression Voices from the entire collection are displayed.
Sounds marked by “ ” support the Active Expression function.
4.
5.
Touch < > < > to change screens, and touch a voice name.
Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose sound you wish to set to confirm the voice.
The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.
An active expression voice will be selected.
You can also confirm the voice by touching <Exit> in the
Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.
59
AT-500_e.book 60 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Performing with a Human Voice
In addition to sounds such as organ and piano, you can also play “human voice,” which produces a vocal-like sound.
1.
Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice to select ON (lit) or OFF (dark).
The setting of the [Alternate] button: ON (lit) or OFF (dark), determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned.
2.
Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice.
The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds.
fig.01-15.eps
For details on the Human Voice that are available, refer to
“Voice List” (Appendix: separate booklet).
3.
fig.01-15.eps
Touch a button that shows a sound group.
NOTE
When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in the display screen, but the Main screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen.
If you want to change the voice for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the
Others Voice screen appears in the display.
fig.01-16.eps
A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.
60
AT-500_e.book 61 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
4.
fig.01-40.eps
In the sub-window, touch <Human Voice>.
The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.
The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the Human Voice group.
The Others Voice screen appears, and the sounds of the Human Voice group appears.
5.
fig.01-41.eps
Touch < > < > to switch the screen, and touch a voice name to select the desired voice.
For some human voices, such as “Jazz Scat,” the sound will change depending on the strength at which you play the keyboard. If the Utility menu
setting “Initial Touch” (p. 198)
is “OFF,” the sound will not change in response to the dynamics of your keyboard playing.
6.
Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose sound you wish to set to confirm the voice.
The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.
You can also confirm the voice by touching <Exit> in the
Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.
61
AT-500_e.book 62 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Adjust the Volume Balance
The ATELIER allows you to adjust the volume balance individually for each
Part.
fig.01-26.eps
62
The following buttons are used to adjust the volume of a multiple number of
Parts.
Button
Accomp/SMF [
▲
] [
▼
] button
Part
Automatic Accompaniment (except Bass)
Playback of performance songs from something other than the ATELIER performance songs (for example: SMF music files)
Rhythm [
▲
] [
▼
] button
(When the [Manual Percussion] button is ON)
Rhythm [
▲
] [
▼
] button
(When the [Manual Percussion] button is OFF)
Manual percussion
Rhythm performance
Drums/SFX
Pedal Level [
▲
] [
▼
] button
Pedal part voice
Bass note of Automatic Accompaniment
You can use the Solo part’s harmonic bar to adjust the volume of the Solo part.
AT-500_e.book 63 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
1.
fig.01-27.eps
The volume levels of each part are adjusted using the corresponding [
▲
] and [
▼
] buttons.
Pressing the upper button ([
▲
] button) will increase the volume.
Pressing the lower button ([
▼
] button) will decrease the volume.
The volume can be set to any value from 0 to 12.
When the volume value shown in the display is 0, that part will produce no sound.
You can also press the [
▲
] button or [
▼
] button of the part whose volume you wish to adjust, so that the “Part Balance Monitor screen” is displayed for several seconds, allowing you to check the volume balance.
The Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several seconds and then closes automatically.
If you touch <Hold>, the screen continues to be displayed until you touch <Exit>.
63
AT-500_e.book 64 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift)
The pitch of the sound played by the keyboard can be adjusted in one-octave steps. This function is called “Octave Shift.” You can apply an Octave shift to all Parts.
1.
fig.00-06.eps
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
fig.VoiceList.eps
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch either <Upper>, <Lower>, or <Pedal>.
Upper
Lower
Pedal
Menu Part whose pitch will change
To change the pitch of the Upper and Solo part
To change the pitch of the Lower part
To change the pitch of the Pedal part
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Octave Shift.
64
AT-500_e.book 65 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
4.
fig.01-30.eps
Touch the part display of the part whose Octave Shift settings you wish to change.
Selecting and Playing Sounds
You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching <Pedal>,
<Lower>, and <Upper>.
5.
fig.01-31.eps
Touch < > < > to adjust the settings.
The value can be set to a range of +/- 3 octaves.
When the power is turned on, the Octave Shift setting for the
Pedal part will be set to -1 (1 octave down).
6.
Touch <Exit>.
You will return to the Upper Keyboard/Lower Keyboard/Pedalboard screen.
NOTE
Please note that when you apply the Octave Shift function to certain voices, their pitch could be stretched beyond their recommended note ranges, and they may not sound as expected. Care should be taken when using Octave Shift.
65
AT-500_e.book 66 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower
Keyboard (Drums/SFX)
You can use the Lower keyboard to play various drum sounds (drum set). In this case, the Lower voices will no longer sound.
fig.01-32_AT-900.eps
Refer to “Drum Set List” for details on which drum sound or
Sound Effect will be played by each note.
1.
fig.01-33-1.eps
Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up.
The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will alternate between on (lit) and off (dark) each time it is pressed.
The Drums/SFX (drums/sound effects) screen will be displayed for several seconds.
NOTE
It is not possible to select and play both [Drums/SFX] and
[Manual Percussion] buttons simultaneously.
2.
Play the Lower keyboard and listen to the various drum sounds on each key.
NOTE
For some drum sets, there will be keys that do not sound.
66
AT-500_e.book 67 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Changing Drums/SFX Sets
As the drum set, you can choose the types of drum set and sound effect. When you change the drum set, the sound produced by each note will change.
Immediately after the power is turned on, the POP drum set will sound.
1.
fig.01-33-1.eps
Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up.
The Drums/SFX screen will be displayed for several seconds.
For the types of drum set and the sound effects played by each key, refer to “Drum/SFX
Set List” (Appendix: separate booklet).
NOTE
After the Drums/SFX (drums/ sound effects) screen is displayed, it will close automatically after several seconds unless you touch the screen to select a drums/sound effects set. If you wish to switch drums/sound effect sets, quickly select the desired drums/sound effect set while the Drums/SFX
(drums/sound effects) screen is displayed.
2.
While the Drums/SFX screen is displayed, touch a Drum/
SFX set name in the screen.
The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will begin to blink.
You can select from 16 different Drum Sets and one set of Sound Effects as follows:
Drums/SFX Set
POP, ROCK, JAZZ BRUSH, VOX DRUM, STANDARD, STANDARD2, ROOM,
ROOM2, POWER, ELECTRONIC, TR-808, DANCE, JAZZ, BRUSH, BRUSH2,
ORCHESTRA, SOUND EFFECTS
3.
Press the [Drums/SFX] button once again.
The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will change from blinking to lit, and your choice of drum set will be finalized.
You can also confirm the
Drums/SFX set by touching
<Exit> in the Drums/SFX screen.
You can also play the lower manual to confirm the drum set.
67
AT-500_e.book 68 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a
Voice Phrase (Manual Percussion)
You can play various drum sounds and Sound Effects using the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard. This is convenient when you wish to play the
Lower voice together with drum sounds or Sound Effects.
fig.01-34_AT-900.eps
fig.01-35.eps
the keys for Drum sounds or Sound Effects
15 keys Lower Keyboard
fig.01-35-2
1.
fig.01-36-1.eps
Press the [Manual Percussion] button (indicator lights).
The button will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF (dark) each time it is pressed.
The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds.
NOTE
It is not possible to select and play both [Drums/SFX] and
[Manual Percussion] buttons
2.
When you play the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard the chosen drum sound is played on each key.
68
AT-500_e.book 69 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Changing the Manual Percussion Sets
You can choose the type of Manual Percussion Set.
When you change the Manual Percussion Set, the sound played by each of the 15 lowest notes of the Lower keyboard will change.
Immediately after the power is turned on, the PERC SET1 drum set will sound.
1.
fig.01-36-1.eps
Press the [Manual Percussion] button (indicator lights).
The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds.
Refer to “Manual Percussion
List” (Appendix: separate booklet) for details on which percussion sound will be played by each note.
NOTE
The Manual Percussion screen will automatically close after several seconds if you do not touch the screen to select a manual percussion set. If you wish to change the manual percussion set, you must select a manual percussion set quickly while the manual percussion screen is displayed.
2.
While the Manual Percussion screen is displayed, touch a manual percussion set name in the screen.
The [Manual Percussion] button indicator will begin to flash.
You can select from 6 different Manual Percussion Sets;
Manual Percussion Set
PERC SET 1, PERC SET 2, ORCHESTRA SET, LATIN SET, VOICE PHRASE, SFX SET
3.
Press the [Manual Percussion] button once again.
The [Manual Percussion] button indicator will change from blinking to lit, and your choice of drum set will be finalized.
You can also confirm the
Manual Percussion set by touching <Exit> in the Manual
Percussion screen.
You can also play the lower manual to confirm the manual percussion set.
69
AT-500_e.book 70 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting and Playing Sounds
Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part (Lower Voice Hold)
You can have Lower voice continue to sound after you release you fingers from the keys, until the next key is played.
1.
Hold down the Pedal [To Lower] button for several seconds until its indicator begins blinking.
fig.02-14_AT-900.eps
The Pedal [To Lower] button is
ON simultaneously.
The following message appears.
The notes played on the lower keyboard will continue sounding.
2.
Press the Pedal [To Lower] button so its indicator goes out.
The sound that was being sustained will stop, and the instrument will return to the normal playing state.
70
AT-500_e.book 71 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
The ATELIER lets you enjoy playing along with a Rhythmic accompaniment.
Selecting a Rhythm
The ATELIER provides various Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniments
(Music Styles).
The ten buttons below are called “Rhythm buttons,” and let you select Rhythms that are categorized by musical style.
fig.02-01_AT-900.eps
For details, refer to the Voice
List (Appendix: separate booklet).
1.
Press a Rhythm button to select a Rhythm group.
The indicator will light.
A Rhythm screen like the following appears.
fig.02-09.eps
You can also open the Rhythm screen by touching <Rhythm> in the Main screen.
3.
The Rhythms in the selected Rhythm group appear in the display.
2.
Touch < > < > to switch screens, and touch a Rhythm name to select the desired Rhythm.
The indicator of Rhythm button will blink.
Press the Rhythm button once again (indicator lights constantly).
The Rhythm button’s indicator will change from blinking to light.
You can also confirm the
Rhythm by touching <Exit> in the Rhythm screen.
71
AT-500_e.book 72 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory
The ATELIER features a User memory.
What is the User Memory?
This is the internal memory area that lets you store User Rhythms you’ve created. You can also copy Rhythms saved on USB memory to the User
The ATELIER is shipped from the factory with Rhythms already stored in User memory. These Rhythms can be rewritten at will; either by copying Rhythms from USB memory to user memory, or by saving User Rhythms you’ve created
using the Rhythm Customize function (p. 187). The content of User memory is
retained even while the ATELIER’s power is turned off.
You can call up Rhythms in User memory by pressing the [User] button.
Calling Up Rhythms Stored in User Memory
1.
Press the [User] button.
The Rhythm screen appears.
If you wish to copy a Rhythm saved on USB memory to User
If you want to restore the original Rhythms that User memory contained at the time the instrument was shipped from the factory, refer to
“Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings”
2.
3.
Touch < > < > on the Rhythm screen to select “User.”
The Rhythms stored in user memory will be shown.
Touch < > < > to switch screens, and touch a Rhythm name to select the desired Rhythm.
The indicator of [User] button will blink.
4.
After selecting a Rhythm, press the flashing [User] button once more.
The [User] button stops flashing and remains lit, indicating that the Rhythm has been selected.
72
If USB memory is connected, you can touch < -> < > to select “Ext Memory” so that
Rhythms in the USB memory will be shown.
You can also confirm the
Rhythm by touching <Exit> in the Rhythm screen.
AT-500_e.book 73 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Rhythm Search
You can search for Rhythm that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or other criteria you set.
You can also search Rhythm using the first character of the Rhythm names.
1.
fig.00-06.eps
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
If another screen is open, touch
<Main> to access the main screen.
fig.02-09.eps
The following Rhythm screen appears.
You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing Rhythm buttons.
2.
fig.02-30.eps
Touch < > on the Main screen.
A sub-window appears.
You can also search only for
Rhythms other than the internal
Rhythms accessed with the
[User] button. The icon does not appear in the display while the [User] button Rhythms are displayed.
73
AT-500_e.book 74 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Searching by Rhythm Name
3.
4.
Touch <By Name>.
Decide which character you will use for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”
→
“B”
→
“C”...).
Touch <ABC/123> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
5.
Touch <Start> (Start Search).
The search results appear in the display.
To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen.
6.
Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Rhythm screen.
Searching by Conditions
3.
Touch <By Conditions>.
You can use four different criteria in searches: “Tempo,” “Beat,” “Groove,” and “Genre.”
4.
5.
6.
Touch the value for the search term.
Touch < > < > to adjust the settings.
Touch <Start> (Start Search).
The search results appear in the display.
To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen.
7.
Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Rhythm screen.
74
AT-500_e.book 75 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Playing Rhythm
There are two ways to start the Rhythm. You can press the [Start/Stop] button to start the Rhythm, or you can use Sync Start to have the Rhythm start when you play the lower keyboard or the pedal keyboard.
You can also make the Rhythm start with an intro, or stop with an ending.
fig.02-03_AT-900.eps
The functions of the [Intro/
Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each
side of the Expression Pedal (p.
You can change the operation of the Fill In [Auto] button or Fill
Starting at the Press of a Button
Starting with an Added Intro
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
2.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.
While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.
Starting Without an Intro
1.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.
Making the Intro Short and Simple
1.
2.
3.
Press the Variation [1] button to make the indicator light up.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.
For more on the Variation
75
AT-500_e.book 76 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower
Keyboard or Pedalboard (Sync Start)
Starting with an Added Intro
1.
2.
Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
The [Intro/Ending] button’s indicator will light.
3.
Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard.
The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.
While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.
Starting Without an Intro
1.
2.
Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.
Play either the Lower keyboard or the pedalboard.
The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.
Making the Intro Short and Simple
1.
2.
3.
Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.
Press the Variation [1] button.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
[Intro/Ending] button indicator will blink.
4.
Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard.
A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.
NOTE
If the Arranger function is ON
(the Arranger [On/Off] button indicator is lit), it is not be able to start the Rhythm by playing
For more on the Variation
button, refer to “Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic
76
AT-500_e.book 77 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Stopping the Rhythm
Stopping with an Ending
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
An Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.
While the Ending is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off.
Stopping without an Ending
1.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played.
Making the Ending Short and Simple
1.
2.
Press the Variation [1] button.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
A short Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.
Changing a Rhythm’s Tempo
You can change the tempo of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment (p.
fig.02-04.eps
The functions of the [Intro/
Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each
side of the Expression Pedal (p.
1.
Press the Tempo [ ] and [ ] buttons to change the tempo (speed) of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment.
Tempo [ ] button
Tempo [ ] button
The tempo becomes slower
The tempo becomes faster
By pressing the Tempo [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously, the tempo is returned to the standard (preset) tempo for the selected Rhythm.
The value of the tempo currently set (20–500 beats per minute) can be checked in the screen.
If “Auto Std Tempo” (p. 203) is
on, and you switch the Rhythm while the Rhythm is stopped, the tempo will automatically be set appropriately for that
Rhythm.
If you switch Rhythms when
“Auto Std Tempo” is off, the tempo remains unchanged even when you switch the Rhythm.
You can confirm the tempo and beat with the “bouncing ball” in
You can also use the [Value] dial to change the tempo.
77
AT-500_e.book 78 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro
If an intro is played before your performance, you can have a countdown played to the end of the intro, allowing you to understand easily where you are to start playing.
fig.02-05_AT-900.eps
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the [Count Down] button, getting the indicator to light.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The intro plays, and a countdown plays to the end of the intro.
When the [Sync Start] button is lit, specifying the chord on the Lower keyboard starts the intro, and a countdown is given.
To stop the countdown, press the [Count Down] button, turning off the indicator light.
Playing Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment
The Arranger function of the ATELIER can add an Automatic Accompaniment to each Rhythm. Based on the selected Rhythm, the Arranger function automatically adds an accompaniment that is suitable for the chord being pressed on the Lower keyboard.
fig.02-06.eps
You can change the countdown
NOTE
When the Arranger [On/Off]
button is on, Sync Start (p. 76)
on the pedalboard cannot be used.
1.
2.
Press the Arranger [On/Off] button (indicator lights).
Arranger [On/Off] button
Lit (On)
Unlit (Off)
Function
Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment
Rhythm
Start the Rhythm (p. 75).
The Rhythm and the Automatic Accompaniment will play together.
If the Arranger [On/Off] button is ON and no Pedal Bass voice is selected, the Automatic Accompaniment will play the bass sound.
78
NOTE
The lower voice is not played during the performance of the intro and ending, even when the Lower keyboard is played.
AT-500_e.book 79 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment
You can add variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment by changing the Rhythm pattern of the Rhythm or the arrangement of the Automatic
Accompaniment, or by inserting a break (i.e., stopping the Rhythm for one measure).
fig.02-07_AT-900.eps
The functions of the Variation buttons and Fill In [Break] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal.
Function of the Foot Switch” (p.
Button name
Fill In [Auto] button
Fill In [Break] button
Function
A fill-in will automatically be added when you press a Variation button to change the accompaniment or
Rhythm arrangement.
Stop the Rhythm at the end of that measure (Break).
You can change the behavior of the Fill In [Auto] button and
Fill In [Break] button (p. 203).
What’s a fill-in?
A Fill In is a short phrase that is inserted at a break in the melody or at a point where the character of the song changes (between Chorus’s or Verses).
Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and
Accompaniment (Variation)
You can change the arrangement of the accompaniment. This function is called “Variation.” For each Rhythm, there are four types of arrangement for the accompaniment.
The following buttons are called Variation buttons.
fig.02-08_AT-900.eps
1.
Press the Variation buttons to change the arrangement of the accompaniment.
The indicator of the button you pressed will light.
The Variation [1] button produces the simplest arrangement, and the Variation
[4] button produces the most florid.
For an intro or ending, Variation [1] button is the shortest and simplest.
79
AT-500_e.book 80 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Playing Chords with Simple Fingering (Chord Intelligence)
“Chord Intelligence” is a feature that intelligently plays the correct accompaniment chords the moment you play a key specifying a chord on the
Lower keyboard during Automatic Accompaniment.
For example, in order to make the instrument detect a “C Major” chord, you must normally play the three keys “C,” “E,” and “G.” If you use the Chord
Intelligence function, you can simply press a single “C” key in the lower keyboard to sound a C Major chord with the voice selected for the Lower part.
For more information about chord fingering, refer to the
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing a Rhythm button.
fig.02-09.eps
2.
fig.02-10.eps
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
80
AT-500_e.book 81 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rhythm Options screen appears.
fig.02-11.eps
Using Rhythm Performance
When the Leading Bass
function (p. 82) is on and the
Chord Intelligence function is off, you can specify chords with a combination of the lower keyboard and pedalboard.
4.
Touch the Chord Intelligence setting to turn it “ON.”
The Chord Intelligence function can now be used.
Each time you touch the Chord Intelligence setting, it will be switched ON/
OFF.
If you press the root note of the chord (p. 251) in the lower keyboard when
the Chord Intelligence function is ON, all notes in that chord will sound.
For example, if you press the root “C” of the C major chord in the lower keyboard, the notes of the C major chord “C,” “E,” and “G” will be sounded by the voice selected for the lower part.
5.
If you wish to turn off the Chord Intelligence function, switch it “OFF.”
When you touch the [One
Touch Program] button, the
Chord Intelligence setting will automatically be turned ON.
81
AT-500_e.book 82 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Leading Bass Function
When Automatic Accompaniment is used, and the Pedal [To Lower] button is
ON, the Pedal Bass voice will normally play the root note (p. 251) of the
chord you play on the Lower keyboard.
If the Leading Bass function is enabled, the lowest note of the chord you play on the Lower keyboard will then be used as the bass note (the bottom note of the chord). This allows the bass to be a note other than the root of the chord
you play and the bass note will change when inverted chords are played (p.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
fig.02-09.eps
You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing the Rhythm buttons.
2.
fig.02-10.eps
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
When the Leading Bass function is on and the Chord
Intelligence function (p. 80) is
off, you can specify chords with a combination of the lower keyboard and pedalboard.
82
AT-500_e.book 83 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rhythm Options screen appears.
fig.02-11.eps
Using Rhythm Performance
4.
Touch the Leading Bass setting to turn it “ON.”
Each time you touch the Leading Bass setting, it will be switched ON/OFF.
5.
To turn off the Leading Bass function, set the Leading Bass setting to “OFF.”
You can assign the Leading
Bass functions to either of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal.
Function of the Foot Switch” (p.
83
AT-500_e.book 84 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings
(One Touch Program)
The ATELIER provides a very convenient [One Touch Program] button. By simply pressing this button once, the Arranger function will be turned ON, and keyboard voices that are most appropriate for playing with the currently selected Rhythm/Automatic Accompaniment are selected.
By pressing the [One Touch Program] button, you can make the following settings.
• Panel settings (e.g., sounds and volume) suitable for the Rhythm
• Arranger [On/Off] button lit (Automatic Accompaniment playing)
• [Sync Start] button and [Intro/Ending] button lit (Waiting for Sync Start)
• Chord Intelligence function is ON (p. 80)
What is Sync Start?
Sync Start is a function that starts the Rhythm at the moment that you play the lower keyboard or pedalboard.
What is Chord Intelligence?
“Chord Intelligence” is a feature that intelligently decides on accompaniment chords the moment you play some keys specifying a chord during Automatic
Accompaniment.
NOTE
If the Arranger function is ON
(the Arranger [On/Off] button indicator is lit), it is not be able to start the Rhythm by playing
The panel settings specified by the One Touch Program function are as follows.
8 panel settings for each Rhythm (4 panel settings x 2 groups)
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
2
Group (Orchestra)
1
Group (Band)
Rhythm
84
AT-500_e.book 85 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
1.
2.
fig.02-15.eps
Select a Rhythm (p. 71).
Press the [One Touch Program] button.
The [One Touch Program] button’s indicator will light.
fig.02-16.epsf
An One Touch Program Group (One Touch Program Group select) screen like the one shown below will be displayed.
When you press the [One
Touch Program] button, the
“Arranger Update” setting will automatically change to
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
While the One Touch Program Group screen is displayed, touch the screen to select a One Touch Program group.
If you fail to select a One Touch Program group while the One Touch Program
Group screen is displayed, “Basic” will be selected automatically.
Panel settings appropriate for the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will automatically be called up for Registration [1]–[4] buttons.
Press the Registration [1]–[4] button to select panel settings.
On the Lower keyboard, play a chord.
At the moment you play the lower keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then the
Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play.
Press the [Intro/Ending] or [Start/Stop] button to stop the
Rhythm.
Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment stops.
Press the [One Touch Program] button, extinguishing its indicator.
You will return to the panel settings that were in effect prior to pressing the
[One Touch Program] button.
To redisplay the One Touch
Program Group screen, while holding down the Registration
[Write] button, press the [One
Touch Program] button.
Touch the One Touch Program
Group screen to reselect the group.
The One Touch Program function will be turned off if you’re using the Quick
Registration function (p. 35) or
if you’ve loaded a Registration.
85
AT-500_e.book 86 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Using a Rhythm from a USB Memory
The ATELIER contains a variety of Rhythms, but you can also use Rhythms from
USB memory or floppy disk to perform Rhythms in an even wider range of styles.
Reviewing the Rhythms on USB Memory
1.
Press the Rhythm [User] button (confirm that its indicator is lit).
The Rhythm screen appears.
fig.02-21-1.eps
NOTE
Unauthorized use of commercially available Music
Style disk for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws.
If you copy Rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk into user
memory (p. 72), you’ll be able
to access those Rhythms simply by pressing the [User] button
2.
3.
Connect the USB memory containing the Rhythms to the external memory connector.
Touch < > < > to select “Ext Memory” and see the
Rhythms in USB memory.
The Rhythm screen will show the Rhythms on the USB memory.
fig.02-21.eps
If you want to use Rhythms from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext
Drive connector.
If “User” is selected, the
Rhythms saved in User memory
If “Disk” is selected, the
Rhythms saved on the floppy disk will be shown.
4.
5.
Touch the Rhythm screen to select a Rhythm.
The [Start/Stop] button indicator will blink while the Rhythms are being loaded into internal memory.When loading is finished, you will be able to play the selected Rhythm.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The selected Rhythm is played.
86
AT-500_e.book 87 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Copying Rhythms
User memory (p. 72) already contains Rhythms, but you can replace these
Rhythms with Rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk. Rhythms copied from the USB memory into User memory will not be lost even if the power is turned off. It is convenient to copy frequently-used Rhythms into User memory.
Rhythms that you’ve created and saved in user memory can also be copied to
Copying Rhythms from USB Memory to User Memory
1.
Connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.
2.
fig.02-09.eps
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
If you want to copy Rhythms from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext
Drive connector.
3.
fig.02-10.eps
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
87
AT-500_e.book 88 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
4.
Touch <File Edit>.
The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.
5.
Touch <Copy> (Rhythm Copy).
The Rhythm File Copy screen appears.
6.
7.
8.
Touch < > < > to select the media (the location of the
Rhythm you want to copy).
If you want to copy a Rhythm from USB memory, select “Ext Memory.”
If you want to copy a Rhythm from floppy disk, select “Disk.”
Touch < > < > to select the Rhythm you want to copy.
Touch User < > < > to select the copy-destination number.
If you choose <Copy All>, all the Rhythms stored in the currently selected folder of USB memory or the floppy disk will be copied in a single operation.
88
Numbers for which a Rhythm name is shown already have a Rhythm saved to them.
AT-500_e.book 89 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
9.
Touch <Execute>.
The copying of the Rhythm to User memory begins.
When copying ends, the “- - - - -” in the screen will change to the Rhythm name that you copied.
If you select a number in which a Rhythm is already saved, a screen like the following will appear.
fig.02-25.eps
Using Rhythm Performance
NOTE
Never remove the USB memory or turn off the power while the
Rhythm data is being copied from USB memory into the
ATELIER. If you do so, the
Rhythm data will not be loaded into the ATELIER, and malfunctions could result. After returning the Rhythm stored in the user memory to the factory
Rhythm from USB memory once more.
If you want to delete the previously saved Rhythm and overwrite it with the
Rhythm you’re newly saving, touch <OK>.
If you don’t want to delete the previously saved Rhythm, touch <Cancel>, then select a number at which no Rhythm has been saved, and copy the Rhythm to that number.
Copying Rhythms from User Memory to USB Memory
You can copy Rhythms from user memory to USB memory.
In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the “Rhythm File
Copy screen” in step 5 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards.
In this state, you’ll be copying Rhythms from user memory to USB memory.
You can return only the user memory to the factory settings.
Memory to the Original Factory
The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying Rhythms from USB memory to user memory.
89
AT-500_e.book 90 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Changing the Order of the Saved Rhythms
You can rearrange the order of the Rhythms stored in User memory (p. 72) or
USB memory.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
fig.02-09.eps
2.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.02-10.eps
90
AT-500_e.book 91 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
3.
Touch <File Edit>.
The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.
fig.02-32.eps
Using Rhythm Performance
4.
Button
Rename
Up
Down
Delete
Copy
Meaning
Modify the name
Description
The Rename screen appears. You can touch the
screen and rename the selected Rhythm (p. 92).
Change the order
(upward)
Change the order
(downward)
The selected Rhythm will be moved earlier in the order.
The selected Rhythm will be moved later in the order.
Delete the Rhythm
The selected Rhythm will be deleted (p. 94).
Copies the Rhythm
You can copy Rhythms from USB memory to user memory, or copy Rhythms from user
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
Choose “User” if you want to change the order of the Rhythms saved in user memory, or choose “Ext Memory” if you want to change the order of the
Rhythms saved in USB memory. Choose “Disk” if you want to change the order of the Rhythms saved in floppy disk.
5.
6.
7.
Touch < > < > to select the Rhythm.
Touch <Up> or <Down> to move the Rhythm.
Touch <Exit>.
91
AT-500_e.book 92 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Renaming a Saved Rhythm
You can rename Rhythms stored in User memory (p. 72) or USB memory.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.02-10.eps
3.
fig.02-32.eps
Touch <File Edit>.
The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.
4.
5.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
Choose “User” if you want to change the name of the Rhythms saved in user memory, or choose “Ext Memory” if you want to change the name of the
Rhythms saved in USB memory. Choose “Disk” if you want to change the name of the Rhythms saved in floppy disk.
Touch < > < > to select the Rhythm whose name you want to change.
92
AT-500_e.book 93 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
6.
Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
fig.02-30.eps
Using Rhythm Performance
7.
8.
Touch < lowercase/symbols.
> to change among uppercase/
Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available choice, like this: uppercase
→
lowercase
→
symbols
→
uppercase ....
Touch the screen to specify the desired character.
The following characters can be selected.
Uppercase
Lowercase
Symbols
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
! " # % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Delete a character.
Insert a space.
Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.
To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>.
9.
When you’re done making the settings, touch <OK>.
The Rhythm has now been named. The Edit User screen reappears.
10.
Touch <Exit>.
93
AT-500_e.book 94 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using Rhythm Performance
Deleting Saved Rhythm
You can delete Rhythms stored in User memory (p. 72) or USB memory.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.02-10.eps
3.
fig.02-32.eps
Touch <File Edit>.
The Rhythm File Edit screen appears.
94
Button
Rename
Up
Down
Delete
Copy
Meaning
Modify the name
Description
The Rename screen appears. You can touch the
screen and rename the selected Rhythm (p. 92).
Change the order
(upward)
Change the order
(downward)
The selected Rhythm will be moved earlier in the
The selected Rhythm will be moved later in the
Delete the Rhythm The selected Rhythm will be deleted.
Copies the Rhythm
You can copy Rhythms from USB memory to user memory, or copy Rhythms from user
AT-500_e.book 95 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
4.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
Choose “User” if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in user memory, or choose “Ext Memory” if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in USB memory.
Choose “Disk” if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in floppy disk.
5.
Touch < > < > to select the Rhythm that you wish to delete.
6.
Touch <Delete>.
The following display appears.
fig.DelRhythmOK?.eps
Using Rhythm Performance
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
7.
If you are sure that you wish to delete the Rhythm, touch
<OK>.
When a Rhythm is deleted, the deleted Rhythm name will change to “- - - - -.” fig.02-33.eps
95
AT-500_e.book 96 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分 fig.03-01.eps
Using the Registration Buttons
The ATELIER allows you to store sound settings and panel settings in the
Registration buttons.
The ATELIER has a total of eight Registration buttons, and one set of panel settings can be registered to each button, for a total of eight types of panel settings. Each set of panel settings that has been stored in a Registration button is called a “Registration.”
This provides a convenient way to change large numbers of panel settings during a performance, or to recall a complex panel setting.
Settings that have been stored to Registration buttons [1]–[8] are remembered even if the power is turned off. If you wish to restore the settings stored in the Registration buttons to their factory settings, use the
About the Registration Buttons
In addition to assigning voices and Rhythms to the Registration buttons, you can also store the following settings:
• Panel button settings (for example, settings for the Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons and Solo [To Lower] button, etc.)
• Controller settings (functions assigned to foot switches, pitch bend range, etc.)
• Other types of settings (reverb type, tempo settings, degree of initial touch, etc.)
If you would like to know all of the settings that can be recorded to the
Registration buttons, refer to “Settings That Are Stored In the Individual
Registration Buttons” (p. 253).
The eight settings stored at the Registration buttons can be saved as a “set” in
USB memory, a floppy disk, or user memory (p. 103).
In addition to the settings saved to the Registration buttons, the following data is also saved when Registration sets are saved.
• Registration Name
→
• Registration Shift
→
• Arranger Update
→
• Trans. Update (Transpose Update)
→
• Exp. Curve (Expression Curve)
→
• Rhythm Mode setting
→
With the factory settings, the Arranger Update setting is set to “DELAYED.”
If Arranger Update is set to “DELAYED,” you will need to hold down the
Registration button for several seconds in order to recall the tempo and
Rhythm settings.
If you want the tempo and Rhythm settings to be recalled instantly when you press a Registration button, change the Arranger Update setting to
”INSTANT.” For details, refer to “Recalling a Registration” (p. 98)
96
Recorded performance data and Rhythms from User memory
When a Rhythm saved in User memory is assigned to a
Registration set, that Rhythm is copied beforehand to the User memory.
AT-500_e.book 97 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
Procedure for Creating Registration Sets
Prepare the Registrations
A convenient way to make the sequence of Registration buttons to be pressed easy to understand is to store the panel settings starting from the Registration
[1] button, continuing with subsequent buttons in accordance with the progression of the song.
Save the Registrations to the USB memory or User memory
If you want to use more than eight Registrations in a song, save the settings for Registration buttons [1]–[8] to a USB memory or User memory as a set, then continue to store further panel settings again, starting from Registration button [1]. Save all of the Registration sets you have set to the USB memory or user memory.
Arrange the Registrations in the sequence they are to be used
Save the Registration sets to the USB memory or user memory in the order they
are to be used in the song. You can use the File Edit function (p. 112) to alter
the sequence and names of Registrations contained on the USB memory or
User memory (p. 101) as well as delete such Registrations (p. 110).
Using Registration Sets
Call up the Registration sets saved on the USB memory to the ATELIER
Insert the USB memory containing the saved Registration sets into the external memory connector, and read the Registration sets into the ATELIER.
Switch the Registration sets as you perform
Press the Registration buttons to switch Registrations as you play the song.
To call up the next Registration Set, assign the foot switch to “RIGHT + Load
Next” and recall the next Registration set (p. 122).
Storing Registrations
fig.03-03.eps
1.
2.
Make all the panel settings that you wish to store.
While holding down the [Write] button, press one of the
Registration buttons [1]–[8].
The panel settings will be stored in the selected Registration button.
For details on the settings that are stored in a Registration,
97
AT-500_e.book 98 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
Recalling a Registration
Settings that have been registered to Registration buttons [1]–[8] can be recalled in two ways: “INSTANT” and “DELAYED.”
At the factory this is set to “DELAYED.”
How to Recall a Registration (DELAYED)
Recalling Voices and Other Panel Settings
1.
Press and immediately release one of the Registration buttons [1]–[8].
Recalling Settings for Rhythm Performance and
Automatic Accompaniment in Addition to the Panel
Settings
1.
Press and hold a Registration button [1]–[8] for several seconds.
The indicator of the Rhythm select button will blink, and the panel settings and settings related to Rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled.
How to Recall a Registration (INSTANT)
Recalling Settings for Rhythm Performance and
Automatic Accompaniment in Addition to Panel
Settings
1.
Press and immediately release one of the Registration buttons [1]–[8].
When changing the way
Registrations are called up,
refer to “Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations” (p.
98
AT-500_e.book 99 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations
Settings for Rhythm play and Automatic Accompaniment are recalled when you continue holding a Registration button [1]–[8] for several seconds, but you can change this so that the settings are recalled the instant you press the button.
1.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The Registration Load screen appears.
fig.03-05.eps
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.
2.
fig.03-06.eps
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
fig.03-07.eps
Touch <Options>.
The Registration Options screen appears.
You can also use the following method to open the Registration
Options screen.
1.
Touch <Quick Guide> on the
Main screen, to display the
Quick Guide screen.
2.
Press the Registration
[Write] button.
The Registration Options screen appears.
99
AT-500_e.book 100 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
4.
5.
Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch between
“DELAYED” and “INSTANT.”
Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will alternate between
“DELAYED” and “INSTANT.”
Setting
DELAYED
INSTANT
Description
When you press and hold a Registration button [1]–[8] for several seconds, the settings for Rhythm and Automatic
Accompaniment will be recalled in addition to the panel settings.
If you press and immediately release a Registration button [1]–
[8], only the settings that are not related to Rhythm or Automatic
Accompaniment will be recalled.
The panel settings and settings for Rhythm and Automatic
Accompaniment will be recalled the instant that you press a
Registration button [1]–[8].
Touch <Exit>.
You can change the timing of recalling the transpose setting when you press a Registration button.
For details refer to “Changing the Timing at Which
Automatically Registering When You Switch Panel Settings
fig.03-08.eps
When the [Manual] button is ON (lit), all panel settings you make will be stored automatically in the [Manual] button as they are made, thus updating the Registration that had been previously saved.
NOTE
The settings stored in the
[Manual] button will return to their default values when the power is turned off.
100
AT-500_e.book 101 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
Assigning a Name to a Registration Set
When saving Registration sets, names like “Factory Reg.” will be assigned by default, but you can assign a name that will help you later to identify the contents of the Registration set.
1.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The Registration Load screen appears.
fig.03-05.eps
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.
2.
fig.03-09-3.eps
Touch <go to Save>.
The Registration Save screen appears.
3.
fig.03-10-2.eps
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
101
AT-500_e.book 102 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
4.
fig.03-11-2.eps
Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
The Rename screen can also be opened in the following ways.
Main screen <Registration>
→
Registration Load screen
<Utility>
→
Utility screen
<Rename>
5.
6.
Touch < lowercase/symbols.
> to change among uppercase/
Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available choice, like this: uppercase
→
lowercase
→
symbols
→
uppercase ....
Touch the screen to specify the desired character.
The following characters can be selected.
Uppercase
Lowercase
Symbols
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
! " # % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Delete a character.
Insert a space.
Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.
To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>.
7.
fig.03-12.eps
When you’re done making the settings, touch <OK>.
The Registration set in the ATELIER’s internal memory has now been named.
102
AT-500_e.book 103 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
Saving Registration Sets
With the settings of Registration buttons [1]–[8] considered as one set, you can store the Registration set to USB memory or User memory. We recommend that complex panel settings or Registrations you wish to keep be saved on USB memory. Furthermore, when you save Registrations created on the ATELIER to USB memory, you can call up their settings on other ATELIER
Series instruments and use the Registrations the same way.
1.
Connect your USB memory to the external memory connector.
If you want to save Registration data to a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.
Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the
ATELIER.
2.
fig.03-09-3.eps
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The Registration Load screen appears.
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.
3.
fig.03-09.eps
Touch <go to Save>.
The Registration Save screen appears.
If you wish to assign a name before you save, refer to
4.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
If you want to save the Registration to User memory, select “User.”
If you want to save the Registration to USB memory, select “Ext Memory.”
If you want to save the Registration to floppy disk, select “Disk.”
103
AT-500_e.book 104 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
5.
fig.03-09-2.eps
Touch < > < > in the screen to select the savedestination number.
Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as “- - - - -.”
To cancel the Save operation, touch <Exit> to close the Registration Save screen.
6.
fig.03-14.eps
Touch <Save>.
The Save Format screen appears.
You can also save Registrations
Registrations in a folder” (p.
7.
8.
Touch <Original> or <R-Series>.
Settings
Original
R-Series
Description
Save formats that can be used with the AT-900, AT-900C, AT-800,
AT-500, AT-300, AT-100 and AT-75 when saved in this format, the data can also be used by AT-SL Series, AT-45, AT-15 and AT-S
Series devices.
Save formats that can be used with AT-R Series devices
Touch <OK>.
Saving of the Registration data will begin.
When saving ends, the “- - - - -” in the screen will change to the Registration name that you saved.
If you’ve named the Registration, it will be saved with that name.
104
AT-500_e.book 105 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
If the following screen appears
If you select a number at which a Registration has already been saved and touch <Save>, the following screen appears.
fig.E-63.eps
If you wish to update the contents of the Registration data
1.
Touch <OK>.
If you wish to save new data instead of updating the Registration
1.
Touch <Cancel>.
Rewriting of the Registration will be canceled.
2.
In the Registration Save screen, select the number that is displayed as “-----” (a number that currently does not contain Registration data).
3.
Touch <Save> (p. 103).
When saving is complete, the saved Registration name will be displayed.
Saving Registrations in a folder
1.
Carry out steps 1 through 4 of “Saving Registration Sets” (p. 103).
2.
Touch < > < > to select a folder.
3.
Touch the folder namve.
The Registrations in the folder will be displayed.
4.
Carry out steps 5 through 8 of “Saving Registration Sets”(p. 104).
To exit the folder
1.
Touch < > < > to select “Up.”
2.
Touch the “Up” indication.
To create a folder, refer to
105
AT-500_e.book 106 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the ATELIER
Here’s how to recall a previously saved Registration set from the User memory or USB memory into the memory of the ATELIER. Registrations can be selected in the following three ways.
Loading a Set of Registrations (Load)
→
p. 106
You can load a “set” (a collection of settings for Registration buttons [1]–[8]) from USB memory or user memory.
Loading an Individual Registration (Load One)
→
p. 107
Recall the settings of one of the Registration [1]–[8] buttons.
NOTE
Be aware that when you load
Registrations from a USB memory or user memory, the
Registrations that were previously in internal memory will be lost. It is a good idea to save important Registrations to
USB memory or user memory
Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved on the USB
Memory or User Memory (Load Next)
→
p. 122
Assign “RIGHT+ Load Next” to the foot switch, and recall Registration sets in the order in which they are stored in USB memory or user memory.
Loading a Set of Registrations
1.
If you want to load a Registration from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.
If you want to load a Registration from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk containing the
Registration into the floppy disk drive.
2.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The Registration Load screen appears.
fig.03-05.eps
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button.
When you touch <go to Save>, the instrument jumps to the
Registration Save screen.
106
AT-500_e.book 107 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
3.
4.
Touch < > < > to select the Registration that you wish to load into internal memory.
To cancel operation, touch <Exit>.
5.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
If you want to load from the Registration of USB memory, select “Ext Memory.”
If you want to load from the Registration of floppy disk, select “Disk.”
If you want to load from the Registration of user memory, select “User.”
Touch <Load>.
The Registration data will start being load.
When the Registration has been loaded, the Registration Load screen will reappear.
To select a Registration from a
Registration from within a folder” (p. 113).
NOTE
Since the ATELIER is designed with compatibility in mind,
Registrations created on other instruments in the ATELIER series can be recalled.
However, due to differences in the built-in sounds and functions, there will be cases in which the settings cannot be exactly replicated.
Loading an Individual Registration
1.
If you want to load a Registration from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.
If you want to load a Registration from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk containing the
Registration into the floppy disk drive.
2.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The Registration Load screen appears.
fig.03-05.eps
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button.
3.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
If you want to load from the Registration of USB memory, select “Ext Memory.”
If you want to load from the Registration of floppy disk, select “Disk.”
If you want to load from the Registration of user memory, select “User.”
107
AT-500_e.book 108 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
4.
5.
fig.03-06.eps
Touch < > < > to select the Registration that you wish to load into internal memory.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
6.
fig.03-19.eps
Touch <Load One>.
The Load One Registration screen appears.
7.
fig.03-20.eps
Touch <1>–<12> to select the number of the Registration button that you wish to load into internal memory.
108
AT-500_e.book 109 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
8.
fig.03-21.eps
Touch Internal <1>–<8> to select the number of the storage-destination button.
Using the Registration Buttons
To cancel this operation, touch <Cancel>.
9.
fig.03-22.eps
When you’re done making the settings, touch <OK>.
The following display appears.
When the Registration has been loaded, the Registration Load screen will reappear.
109
AT-500_e.book 110 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
Deleting a Set of Registrations
Here’s how to delete a Registration set that was saved to a USB memory, User
memory (p. 218), or floppy disk.
1.
Prepare the Registration that you want to delete.
If you want to delete Registration data from the USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.
If you want to delete Registration data from the floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk.
2.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The Registration Load screen appears.
3.
Touch <File>.
The Registration File Edit screen appears.
fig.03-25.eps
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.
110
Button
Rename
Up
Down
Delete
Create
Copy
Meaning
Modify the name
Change the order
(upward)
Change the order
(downward)
Description
The Rename screen appears. You can touch the screen and rename the selected
The selected Registration will be moved
earlier in the order (p. 112).
The selected Registration will be moved
Delete the Registration The selected Registration will be deleted.
Create new folder A new folder will be created.
Copies the
Registration
You can copy Registration from USB memory to user memory, or copy
Registration from user memory to USB
AT-500_e.book 111 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
4.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
If you want to delete from the Registration to USB memory, select “Ext
Memory.”
If you want to delete from the Registration to floppy disk, select “Disk.”
If you want to delete from the Registration to user memory, select “User.”
5.
6.
Touch < > < > to select the Registration that you wish to delete.
Touch <Delete>.
The following display appears.
fig.E-64.eps
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
7.
fig.03-28.eps
If you are sure that you wish to delete the Registration, touch <OK>.
When the Registration has been deleted, the Registration File Edit screen will reappear.
When a Registration is deleted, the deleted Registration name will change to
“- - - - -.”
111
AT-500_e.book 112 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
Changing the Name or Order of Registration
After saving Registrations on USB memory, user memory (p. 218), or floppy
disk, you can change the order or name of the Registrations, or delete a
Registration (p. 110). If you assign the foot switch to “RIGHT + Load Next” (p.
122), you’ll be able to recall Registration sets in the order in which they are
stored in USB memory or user memory. This function is very convenient when you’re getting ready to perform.
1.
Prepare the Registration(s) that you want to rename or sort.
If you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.
If you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the External Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
2.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The Registration Load screen appears.
fig.03-05.eps
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.
3.
fig.03-25.eps
Touch <File>.
The Registration File Edit screen appears.
112
AT-500_e.book 113 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
4.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
Choose “Ext Memory” if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on
USB memory, or “Disk” if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on a floppy disk. Choose “User” if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved in user memory.
5.
Touch < > < > in the screen to select a Registration.
Changing the Order of Registration
6.
Touch <Up> or <Down> to move the Registration.
Button
Up
Down
Mean
Change the order
(upward)
Change the order
(downward)
Description
The selected Registration will be moved earlier in the order.
The selected Registration will be moved later in the order.
Changing the Name of the Registration
7.
Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
Rename the Registration as described in “Assigning a Name to a Registration
8.
Touch <OK>.
To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>.
NOTE
If there’s a Registration that you want to delete, touch
< > < > to select the
Registration, then touch
<Delete>. When a message asking you to confirm the deletion appears, touch <OK>.
You can rename the folder in the Registration File Edit screen.
To create a folder, refer to
Selecting a Registration from within a folder
1.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen to display the Registration Load screen.
2.
Touch < > < > to select a folder.
3.
Touch the folder name.
The Registrations in the folder will be displayed.
4.
Touch the Registration name.
To exit the folder
1.
Touch < > < > to select “Up.”
2.
Touch the “Up” indication.
113
AT-500_e.book 114 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons
Copying Registrations
Registrations from USB memory or floppy disk can be copied to user memory.
If a Registration saved in USB memory or on a floppy disk is stored in user memory, the stored Registration data will not disappear even when you turn off the power. It is convenient to load frequently-used Registration into User memory.
Registrations saved in user memory can also be copied to USB memory (p.
Copying Registration from USB Memory to User
Memory
1.
2.
fig.03-05.eps
Connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The Registration Load screen appears.
If you want to copy Registration from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext
Drive connector.
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.
3.
fig.03-25.eps
Touch <File>.
The Registration File Edit screen appears.
114
AT-500_e.book 115 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
4.
Touch <Copy>.
The Registration File Copy screen appears.
Using the Registration Buttons
5.
Touch < > < > to select the media (the location of the
Registration you want to copy).
If you want to copy a Registration from USB memory, select “Ext Memory.”
If you want to copy a Registration from floppy disk, select “Disk.”
6.
Touch < > < > to select the Registration you want to copy.
If you choose <Copy All>, all
Registrations stored in the currently selected folder of the
USB memory or floppy disk will be copied in a single operation.
7.
Touch User < > < > to select the copy-destination number.
Numbers for which a Registration name is shown already have a Rhythm saved to them.
8.
Touch <Execute>.
The copying of the Registration to User memory begins.
When copying ends, the “- - - - -” in the screen will change to the Registration name that you copied.
NOTE
Never remove the USB memory or turn off the power while the
Registration data is being copied from USB memory into the ATELIER. If you do so, the
Registration data will not be loaded into the ATELIER, and malfunctions could result. After returning the Registration stored in the user memory to
the factory settings (p. 218), re-
load the Registration from USB memory.
115
AT-500_e.book 116 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Registration Buttons fig.02-25.eps
If you select a number in which a Registration is already saved, a screen like the following will appear.
You can return only the user memory to the factory settings.
Memory to the Original Factory
If you want to delete the previously saved Registration and overwrite it with the Registration you’re newly saving, touch <OK>.
If you don’t want to delete the previously saved Registration, touch <Cancel>, then select a number at which no Registration has been saved, and copy the
Registration to that number.
Copying Registration from User Memory to USB
Memory
You can copy Registration from user memory to USB memory.
In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the “Registration File
Copy screen” in step 4 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards.
In this state, you’ll be copying Registration from user memory to USB memory.
The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying Registration from USB memory to user memory.
116
AT-500_e.book 117 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Performance Functions
Transposing to a Different Key (Key Transpose)
You can transpose the key of a performance without having to shift the position of your fingers on the keyboard. This feature is called “Key
Transpose.”
For example, even if the song is in a difficult key with numerous sharps or flats, you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to play.
fig.04-01.eps
1.
fig.04-02.eps
Set the value for the transposition with the Transpose [-] and [+] buttons.
Each time you press a Transpose [-] [+] button, the pitch will be transposed by a semitone.
Acceptable values range from A to G (in semitone steps).
The specified value will be displayed in the Main screen.
The transposition setting is stored in the Registration. For details on the settings that are stored in the Registration, refer
to “Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons” (p.
State of the Transpose [-] [+] buttons
If transposed (non-C)
If not transposed (C)
One of the Transpose [-] [+] button indicators is lit.
The Transpose [-] [+] button indicators are extinguished.
2.
By pressing the Transpose [-] [+] buttons simultaneously, you can restore the default setting C.
You can change the timing at which the transposition settings saved in a Registration will be recalled. For details refer to
117
AT-500_e.book 118 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Performance Functions
Adjusting the Brightness of the Sound
Using the [Brilliance] slider, you can adjust the brightness of the sound.
For a brighter sound, push the slider away from you. For a mellower sound, pull the slider toward you.
fig.04-06.eps
NOTE
This setting is not stored in the
Registration.
You can adjust not only the treble range but the bass as well with the
[Brilliance] slider. You can suppress the lower frequencies by moving the slider downwards.
Adding Decay to the Sound (Damper Pedal)
When you depress the Damper (Sustain) pedal, a decay effect will be added to the voices.
While you continue depressing the damper pedal, notes will be sustained even if you release the keys.
fig.04-04.eps
By default the decay effect will be applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard.
You can modify the setting so that decay is only applied to notes played on the Upper
NOTE
Decay cannot be added to the
Solo voices.
NOTE
Decay can be applied to Pedal
Bass voices played on the
Lower keyboard (when the
Pedal [To Lower] button indicators are lit or set “Bass
Split” to “ON“ ). In this case, a decay will not be applied to the pedal bass voice.
118
AT-500_e.book 119 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Performance Functions
Using the Pitch Bend/Vibrato Lever
When you move the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever to the left or right, you can obtain a smooth change in the pitch of the notes being played (Pitch Bend effect). Move the lever to the right to raise the pitch, and to the left to lower it.
Also, when you push the lever away from you, a vibrato effect can be obtained.
fig.04-05.eps
You can also adjust the range of the pitch which is shifted by the Pitch Bend lever. For details,
Vibrato Effect
Please note that only the appropriate voices will allow vibrato to be added, refer to
“Voice list” (Appendix: separate booklet).
Pitch Bend Effect
By default (immediately after the power is turned on) the Pitch Bend effect is added to the voices of all the sections being played on the Upper keyboard.
You can change the settings so that both the Pitch Bend and
Vibrato effects are applied to the Lower keyboard voice or the voices on the Pedalboard.
Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply” (p.
119
AT-500_e.book 120 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Performance Functions
Using the Foot Switches
On either side of the expression pedal are two Foot Switches. Different functions are assigned to each of these two foot switches. fig.04-07.eps
You can also change the functions assigned to the left and right Foot Switches.
Please refer to “Changing the Function of the Foot Switch” (p. 121).
With the factory settings, the following functions are assigned to the left and right Foot Switches.
Right Foot Switch
Left Foot Switch
Switch the Rotary effect between Fast/Slow.
If Rotary is turned on, the Rotary effect will switch between
“Fast” and “Slow” each time you press the Foot Switch.
Glide (an effect by which the pitch is lowered by a semitone while the foot switch is pressed, and is returned to what is originally was when you release your foot).
While you are pressing the Foot Switch, the pitch will be temporarily lowered. When you release the Foot Switch, the pitch will return to normal gradually.
NOTE
If “Registration Shift” is turned
“RIGHT,” “LEFT,” or “RIGHT
+Load Next,” the foot switch will function only to switch
The Glide effect will only be applied to the keyboard section that has been specified as being the destination for the
Pitch bend/Vibrato lever.
Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply” (p.
You can store functions to be assigned to the foot switch to individual
120
AT-500_e.book 121 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Performance Functions
Changing the Function of the Foot
Switch
You can select any of the following functions and assign them to either Foot Switch on the right or left side of the Expression
Pedal.
1.
2.
3.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
Touch < > < > to display the L Foot Switch or R Foot Switch.
fig.09-08.eps
4.
Touch <L Foot Switch> or <R Foot Switch> setting.
fig.09-09.eps
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
If the “Registration Shift” setting is “RIGHT,” “LEFT,” or
“RIGHT + Load next,” the Foot Switch will be dedicated to switching through the Registrations, and the “R Foot Switch”
or “L Foot Switch” setting will be ignored (p. 122).
Available functions
ROTARY FAST/SLOW
GLIDE
LEADING BASS
RHYTHM START/STP
COMP PLAY/STOP
INTRO/ENDING
VARIATION UP
VARIATION DOWN
VARIATION ALT.
FILL IN
BREAK
DAMPER OF UPPER
DAMPER OF LOWER
OFF
Description
Switch the Rotary speed between
“FAST” and “SLOW.”
While the Foot Switch is pressed, the pitch will temporarily be lowered, and will gradually return to normal when you release the
Foot Switch. When the power is turned on, Glide effect is added to the voice of all the sections being played on Upper keyboard.
The Leading Bass function (p. 82)
will operate only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.
Start/Stop the Rhythm.
The same function as the
Composer [Play/Stop] button.
Each time you press the Foot
Switch, the performance data will play back or stop.
Play an Intro or Ending.
Switches the Variation button.
Each time you press the foot switch, the Variation number will increment.
Switches the Variation button.
Each time you press the foot switch, the Variation number will decrement.
Switches the Variation button.
If the Variation [1] button or [3] button is selected, this will switch between the Variation [1] and [3] buttons.
If the Variation [2] button or [4] button is selected, this will switch between the Variation [2] and [4] buttons.
Adds a fill-in.
Stop the Rhythm at the end of that measure.
Notes played on the Upper keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pressing the
Foot Switch.
Notes played on the Lower keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pressing the
Foot Switch.
Turns the foot switch function off.
121
AT-500_e.book 122 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Performance Functions
Using the Foot Switch to Switch
Registrations
You can use the Foot Switch as a dedicated switch for selecting Registrations in order. The Registration will be switched each time you press the foot switch.
NOTE
The Registration Shift settings are stored to each individual
Registration Set. When “RIGHT + Load Next” is assigned to the foot switch and the Load Next function is used to switch
Registration Sets saved to a USB memory or floppy disk, set the Registration Shift setting to “RIGHT + Load Next” for all saved Registrations.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Registration
Shift.
fig.09-08.eps
4.
Touch the Registration Shift setting (OFF/
RIGHT/LEFT/RIGHT + Load Next).
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while the power is turned off.
Setting
OFF
RIGHT
Description
You can use a function assigned to the foot switch.
The right foot switch is dedicated to switching
Registrations. The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used.
Setting
LEFT
RIGHT +
Load Next
Description
The left foot switch is dedicated to switching
Registrations. The function assigned to the left foot switch cannot be used.
The right foot switch is dedicated to switching
Registrations. The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used.
Selecting the Registration [8] button and pressing the right foot switch activates the
Load Next function, calling up the next
Registration saved to the USB memory, user memory, or floppy disk. The Registration Load window appears in the display. When you then press the right foot switch again, the
Registration Set is confirmed, and the
Registration [1] button is selected.
Example:
1
→
2
→
3...
→
8
→
Load Next
(Next Registration) 1
→
What is “Load Next”?
You can use the Load Next function to call up
Registrations in the order saved to the USB memory, user memory, or floppy disk. When you will be performing live, you can save Registration sets to USB memory, user memory, or floppy disk in the order in which you will be performing. Then while you perform, you can recall the next Registration set easily and smoothly.
Checking the next Registration set
1.
Display the Main screen (p. 29).
2.
Touch < > icon several times to switch to
< > (Regist).
The Main screen display will switch to the Registration.
fig.03-23-2.eps
“Next” will indicate the name of the next Registration set.
122
AT-500_e.book 123 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Performance Functions
Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal
fig.04-03.eps
You can use the expression pedal to adjust the overall volume. When you depress the Expression Pedal, the volume increases. The volume decreases as you tilt the pedal back.
You can specify how the
Expression Pedal will affect the
Decrease the volume
Increase the volume
You can also specify whether the Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the recording of your
Using the expression pedal enables you to give your performances even richer musical expressiveness.
The expression pedal features the following special characteristics:
• Completely releasing the expression pedal does not lower the volume to zero. If you do want to turn down the volume completely, set the [Master
Volume] slider to the Min (Minimum) position.
• Even as you release your foot from the expression pedal and lower the volume, the lower-range portion will linger on. This provides a naturalsounding resonance.
• When an Active Expression voice is selected, the expression pedal can be
used to produce changes in the voice (p. 59).
You can specify whether the
Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the playback of recorded
123
AT-500_e.book 124 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Performance Functions
Adjusting the Depth of the Expression Pedal
You can set the amount of effect applied when you step on the expression pedal.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Exp. Curve
(Expression Curve).
4.
Touch <Exp. Curve> setting.
fig.09-11.eps
fig.09-11-3.e.eps
Rhythm,
Auto
Accompaniment
Keyboard Part
1
2
Rhythm, Auto Accompaniment, Keyboard Part
3
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
1
2
3
4
Description
The position of the expression pedal does not really affect the Rhythm performances and
Automatic Accompaniment.
This setting is convenient when you do not want to have the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment volume change much.
The expression pedal is applied to the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just as it is to the keyboard performance.
The volume is easily adjusted according to the angle of the expression pedal, making this setting perfect for use in songs with big changes in dynamics.
The expression pedal is applied to the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just as it is to the keyboard performance.
The expression affect is applied more gently than with Setting 2, so this setting is appropriate for quieter songs with less intense dynamic changes.
The expression pedal does not affect the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment at all.
This setting is suitable for ensemble performances and other performances featuring multiple instruments.
124
Rhythm, Auto Accompaniment, Keyboard Part
4
Rhythm,
Auto
Accompaniment
Keyboard Part
6.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
AT-500_e.book 125 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
The ATELIER allows you to apply various effects to the sounds you play from the keyboard.
Adding Harmony to a Melody (Harmony Intelligence)
Harmony appropriate for the chord you play in the lower keyboard can be added to the highest note played in the upper keyboard. This function is called
“Harmony Intelligence.”
When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] button, the voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically.
fig.05-01.eps
1.
Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button (indicator lights).
Each time you press the button, the indicator will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF (unlit).
The name of the selected Harmony Intelligence will be displayed for several seconds in the screen.
fig.05-03.eps
125
AT-500_e.book 126 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Changing the Harmony Intelligence Type
There are 18 different Harmony types.
The manner in which notes will sound also depends on the Harmony type.
When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] button to turn it on (lit), a voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically.
1.
Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button.
The Harmony Intelligence screen appears for several seconds.
fig.05-03.eps
2.
Touch < > < > to switch the screen, and touch the screen to select the desired harmony intelligence.
The indicator of the Harmony Intelligence [Harmony Intelligence] button will blink.
Type of Harmony Intelligence
BIG BAND, STRINGS, BLOCK, TRADITIONAL*, HARP, COMBO, JAZZ SCAT,
COUNTRY, BROADWAY, OCTAVE 1*, OCTAVE 2*, 1 NOTE*, 3 NOTES*,
BIG BAND*, STRINGS*, BLOCK*, JAZZ SCAT*, BROADWAY*
3.
Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button once again.
The [Harmony Intelligence] button indicator will light, indicating that the selected harmony intelligence has been confirmed.
You can also confirm the
Harmony Intelligence settings by touching <Exit> on the
Harmony Intelligence screen.
You can also play the upper manual to confirm the type of the Harmony Intelligence.
126
AT-500_e.book 127 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Type
BIG BAND
STRINGS
BLOCK
TRADITIONAL*
HARP
COMBO
JAZZ SCAT
COUNTRY
BROADWAY
OCTAVE 1*
OCTAVE 2*
1 NOTE*
3 NOTES*
BIG BAND*
STRINGS*
BLOCK*
JAZZ SCAT*
BROADWAY*
The way in which the keys you press are sounded by each type of harmony intelligence is described below.
Solo Voice Upper Voice
Trumpet
Strings 1
Flugel Horn
Strings 5
Vibraphone Piano 1
Currently Selected Tone
— Harp
Clarinet
Jazz Scat
Full Organ1
Celesta
Currently Selected Tone
Currently Selected Tone
Currently Selected Tone
Currently Selected Tone
Trombone
Jazz Scat
Jazz Guitar
Theater Or.1
Currently Selected Tone
Currently Selected Tone
Currently Selected Tone
Currently Selected Tone
Currently Selected Tone
Number of notes of the harmony
5
4
5
3
2
2
2
2
4
3
4
3
3
5
4
3
5
4
Harp-type harmony intelligence does not sound the keys you play. Use your left hand to play a chord in the lower keyboard and use your right hand to play a glissando in the upper keyboard, and a beautiful harp glissando will be produced.
NOTE
The number of notes of the harmony will depend on the
Harmony Intelligence type.
127
AT-500_e.book 128 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Adding Modulation to the Sound (Rotary Effect)
Rotary is an effect which simulates the sound of rotating speakers.
There is a choice of two settings: Fast and Slow.
fig.05-06.eps
NOTE
For more on the tones to which the Rotary effect can be applied, refer to “Voice List”
(Appendix: separate booklet).
1.
Select the voice to which you wish to apply the Rotary effect.
2.
Press the Rotary Sound [On/Off] button (confirm that its indicator is lit).
The Rotary effect will be applied to the voice.
3.
Press the Rotary Sound [Fast/Slow] button to switch between Rotary Fast (Lit) and Rotary Slow (Unlit).
Rotary [Fast/Slow] button
Lit (Fast)
Unlit (Slow)
Effect
The effect obtained is equivalent to speakers being rapidly rotated.
Effect simulating the slow rotation of speakers.
When you switch the rotary effect from “Fast” to “Slow,” the modulation will slow down gradually, and when you switch from “Slow” to “Fast” the modulation will speed up gradually.
You can assign the Rotary
Sound [Fast/Slow] button function to the foot switches located on each side of the
128
AT-500_e.book 129 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Making Fine Adjustments to the Rotary
Effect Speed (Rotary Speed)
You can make fine adjustments to the speaker rotation speed
of the rotary effect (p. 128).
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08.eps
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
4.
Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary
Speed to adjust the setting.
fig.05-12-2.eps
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.VoiceList.eps
5.
Touch < > < > to edit the value.
Setting
SLOW, NORMAL, FAST
6.
Touch <Exit>.
These settings remain stored in memory even while the power is off.
2.
Touch <Effect>.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.05-17.eps
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Rotary
Speed.
129
AT-500_e.book 130 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Changing the Brightness of the Rotary
Effect (Rotary Color)
This setting allows you to choose the brightness of the Rotary
sound obtained when using the Rotary effect (p. 128).
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08.eps
4.
Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary
Color to adjust the setting.
Each time you touch the Rotary Color setting, it will switch between “BRIGHT” and “MELLOW.”
Setting
BRIGHT, MELLOW
5.
Touch <Exit>.
These settings remain stored in memory even while the power is off.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.VoiceList.eps
2.
Touch <Effect>.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.05-17.eps
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Rotary Color.
130
AT-500_e.book 131 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Adding Richness to the Sound (Chorus Effect)
Chorus is an effect that adds expansiveness to a sound, making one instrument sound like several.
You can apply a chorus effect for the “Upper Orchestral” and “Lower
Orchestral” voices.
1.
fig.00-06.eps
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
For some of the voices, Chorus may already be turned ON.
fig.VoiceList.eps
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch either <Upper> or <Lower>.
Menu
Upper
Lower
Description
To apply chorus to the Upper Orchestral part
To apply chorus to the Lower Orchestral part
131
AT-500_e.book 132 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
3.
For the part to which you wish to apply the chorus effect, touch the Chorus “ON/OFF” display to change the setting.
Each time you touch the Chorus setting, it will alternate ON/OFF.
fig.05-15.eps
NOTE
Some voices do not allow the
Chorus effect to be applied. For details refer to “Voice List”
(Appendix: separate booklet).
You can open the Lower
Keyboard screen or Upper
Keyboard screen with touching
<Lower> and <Upper>.
Indication
ON
OFF
4.
Touch <Exit>.
Description
The Chorus effect will be applied to the voice.
The Chorus effect will not be applied to the voice.
132
AT-500_e.book 133 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Adding Resonance to the Sound (Sustain Effect)
Sustain allows you to add a sustain effect or decay to each voice after the keys are released.
The Sustain effect can be added to the Upper (except the Solo part), Lower, and Pedal voices.
When Applying Sustain to the Pedal Part
fig.05-22.eps
NOTE
The Sustain effect will not be applied to the Solo part voice.
The length of Sustain can be modified independently for
1.
Press the [Pedal Sustain] button to make the indicator light.
The Sustain effect is applied to the voices of the Pedal Bass part.
When Applying Sustain to the Upper Part and Lower
Part
1.
ffig.00-06.eps
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
fig.VoiceList.eps
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
133
AT-500_e.book 134 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
2.
Touch either <Upper> or <Lower>.
Indication
Upper
Lower
Description
To apply sustain to the Upper part
To apply sustain to the Lower part
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Sustain.
4.
Touch the Sustain setting to switch between “ON” and
“OFF.”
Each time you touch the Sustain setting, it will alternate ON/OFF.
NOTE
You can touch <Pedal> to access the Pedalboard screen and change the sustain settings for the pedal part.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
134
AT-500_e.book 135 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Changing the Sustain Length
The sustain length can be set independently (SHORT, MIDDLE
(Medium) or LONG) for the Upper and Lower keyboards and
Pedalboard.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08.eps
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Sustain
Length.
fig.05-14.eps
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.VoiceList.eps
You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching <Pedal>,
<Lower>, and <Upper>.
4.
For the part whose sustain length you wish to adjust, touch the Sustain “SHORT/MIDDLE/
LONG” display.
fig.05-14-2.eps
2.
Touch either <Upper>, <Lower>, or <Pedal>.
Menu
Upper
Lower
Pedal
Part whose sustain length you wish to change
Upper part
Lower part
Pedal part
5.
Touch < > < > to change the value.
Setting
SHORT, MIDDLE, LONG
6.
Touch <Exit>.
135
AT-500_e.book 136 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb Effect)
fig.05-16-1.eps
Reverb is an effect that adds a sense of spaciousness to the sound, creating the illusion of playing in a large or small concert hall, a large or small room, a small club, etc.
1.
Press the Reverb [
▲
] or [
▼
] buttons to adjust the overall
Reverb amount.
When you press the up button [
▲
], additional Reverb is applied. Pressing the down button [
▼
] decreases the Reverb level. If none of the Reverb indicators are lit, the Reverb effect will not be heard.
When you press the Reverb [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons, the Part Balance Monitor screen appears. In the Part Balance Monitor screen you can check the reverb depth.
fig.01-27.eps
The Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several seconds and then closes automatically.
If you touch <Hold>, the screen continues to be displayed until you touch <Exit> again.
136
AT-500_e.book 137 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Changing the Reverb Type
By changing the reverberations of the notes, you can enjoy the atmosphere of performance in a wide variety of different locations.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08.eps
4.
Touch the value setting buttons for Reverb
Type to adjust the setting.
The following screen appears.
fig.05-18.eps
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.VoiceList.eps
2.
Touch <Effect>.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.05-17.eps
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Reverb Type.
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Display
ROOM 1
ROOM 2
ROOM 3
HALL 1
HALL 2
SMALL CHURCH
LARGE CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PLATE
DELAY
PAN DELAY
Description
Simulates the reverb of a conference room
Simulates the reverb of a performance lounge
Simulates the reverb of a large, open room
Simulates the reverb of a large concert hall
Simulates the reverb of a small concert hall
The reverberation of a small church
The reverberation of a large church
The reverberation of a cathedral
Applies a bright, metallic reverb
An echo-like sound repeated several times
Similarly to the above but where the sound is panned between the left and right speakers
NOTE
It is not possible to modify the delay time (delay interval) when “DELAY” or “PAN DELAY” is selected.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
137
AT-500_e.book 138 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Changing the Wall Type
By changing the type of reverb (p. 137) you can experience
the feeling of performing in various different locations, and by changing the Wall Type (wall material) you can make further adjustments to the way in which reverberation occurs.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08.eps
4.
Touch the value setting buttons for Wall Type to adjust the setting.
The following screen appears.
fig.05-21.eps
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.VoiceList.eps
2.
Touch <Effect>.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.05-17.eps
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Display
DRAPERY
CARPET
ACOUSTIC TILE
WOOD
BRICK
PLASTER
CONCRETE
BLOCK
MARBLE
Description
Pleated curtain
Carpet
Acoustical tile, sound-absorptive tile
Wood
Brick
Plaster
Concrete block
Marble
6.
Touch <Exit>.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Wall Type.
138
AT-500_e.book 139 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Changing the Depth of the Reverb
You can specify the reverb depth for each part.
To adjust the reverb depth for Upper/
Lower/Pedal/Solo
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
ffig.05-08.eps
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Reverb
Depth.
fig.05-17.eps
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.VoiceList.eps
You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching <Pedal>,
<Lower>, and <Upper>.
4.
Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to adjust.
The following screen appears.
fig.05-20.eps
2.
Touch <Upper>, <Lower>, or <Pedal>.
Menu
Upper
Lower
Pedal
Part whose reverb length you wish to change
Upper part, Solo part
Lower part
Pedal part
5.
Touch < > < > to adjust the setting.
Setting
0–10
6.
Touch <Exit>.
139
AT-500_e.book 140 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
To Adjust the Reverb Depth for
Something other Than Upper/Lower/
Pedal/Solo
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
ffig.05-08.eps
fig.05-17_50 fig.05-12-3.eps
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.VoiceList.eps
Part
Accomp (Automatic accompaniment other than the bass part)
Rhythm (Rhythm performance), Drums (Drums/SFX)
M.Perc (Manual Percussion)
A.Bass (Bass part of the Automatic Accompaniment)
Vintage (Vintage Organ)
4.
fig.05-20-2.eps
Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to adjust.
The following screen appears.
2.
Touch <Effect>.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.05-17.eps
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Rev Depth
(Reverb Depth).
5.
Touch < > < > to adjust the setting.
Setting
0–10, AUTO (Accomp, Rhythm, A.Bass only)
For the three Parts of the Accomp, Rhythm and
Accompaniment Bass, you have the option of selecting the “AUTO” setting. Parts for which “AUTO” is selected will be set to the Reverb Depth that is most suitable for the Rhythm currently selected.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
140
AT-500_e.book 141 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Using the D Beam Controller for Additional Enjoyment
Modifying the Sound
You can modify the sound simply by moving your hand above the D Beam controller located on the panel.
1.
Press either the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D
Beam so the button is lit in red.
Pitch
Button
Filter
Volume
Button status
Lit (red)
Lit (red)
Lit (red)
Description
Changes the pitch of the sounds you play on the upper keyboard.
Changes the tonal character of the sounds you play on the upper keyboard.
* For some sounds, the tonal change may be difficult to notice.
Changes the volume of the sounds you play on the upper keyboard.
2.
Move your hand above the D Beam controller.
The effect assigned to the D Beam controller will be applied to the sound.
Effective range of the D Beam controller
The illustration at right shows the effective range of the D
Beam controller. Moving your hand outside this range will not produce any effect.
The effective range of the D Beam controller will be drastically decreased under strong direct sunlight. Please be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outdoors.
Turning the D Beam Controller Off
3.
Press the button you pressed in step 1 several times so its light is turned off.
When the [Pitch], [Filter], or
[Volume] button for the D Beam is lit in green, the sound effect assigned to the D Beam controller will play when you move your hand above the D
NOTE
The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will vary according to the brightness of its surroundings. If it does not operate as you expect, you can readjust the sensitivity.
Increasing the D Beam
sensitivity value (p. 201) will
make it more sensitive.
141
AT-500_e.book 142 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Produce a
Sound Effect
You can produce various sound effects simply by moving your hand above the
D Beam controller on the panel.
1.
Press either the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D
Beam so the button is lit in green.
Pitch
Button
Filter
Volume
Button status
Lit (green)
Lit (green)
Lit (green)
Description
A bass drum and cymbal will sound.
The cymbal will be struck with gradually increasing force.
The sound of a wind chime is produced.
2.
Move your hand above the D Beam controller.
The sound effect assigned to the D Beam controller will play.
Turning the D Beam Controller Off
3.
Press the button you pressed in step 1 several times so its light is turned off
When the [Pitch], [Filter], or
[Volume] button for the D Beam is lit in red, an effect will be applied to the sound when you move your hand above the D
142
AT-500_e.book 143 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
MEMO
143
AT-500_e.book 144 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard
Since the lower keyboard of the ATELIER provides a generous 64 notes, you can use it to play piano pieces with ease. In addition, you can divide the keyboard into two or more sections and play solo voices, play the pedal bass voice, or combine a variety of uses for even more versatility.
For example, the following applications are possible.
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Solo Voice
→
Press the Solo [To Lower] button in the Solo section to Play the Solo voice to the Lower
fig.06-01.eps
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
Manual Percussion
Bass
Lower
Solo
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds or Sound Effects
→
Press the [Manual Percussion] button to play drum sounds or sound effects with the Lower
voice on the lower keyboard (p. 68).
fig.06-03.eps
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
Manual Percussion
Bass
Lower
Solo
Playing Drum Sounds from the Entire Lower Keyboard
→
Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 66).
fig.06-04.eps
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
Manual Percussion
Bass
Lower
Solo
144
AT-500_e.book 145 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Part by Hand
→
Set “Bass Split” to “ON” to play the Pedal Bass voice from the Lower keyboard (p. 149).
fig.06-02.eps
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
Manual Percussion
Bass
Lower
Solo
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds and Solo Voice
→
Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 66), and then press the Solo [To Lower] button (p. 146)
fig.06-01-2.eps
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
Manual Percussion
Bass
Lower
Solo
By changing the combination of voices that are played on the Lower
keyboard, and by changing the Solo Split Point (p. 148) and Bass Split Point
(p. 151), you can create the following types of setup.
fig.06-05.eps
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
Manual Percussion
Bass
Lower
Solo fig.06-06.eps
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
Manual Percussion
Bass
Lower
Solo fig.06-07.eps
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
Manual Percussion
Bass
Lower
Solo
145
AT-500_e.book 146 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button)
Normally, the solo voice will sound on the upper keyboard.
By using the Solo [To Lower] button, you can play the solo voice in the righthand side of the lower keyboard that includes the B4 key. The state in which the keyboard is divided in this way is called “split,” and the location at which the keyboard is divided to play the solo voice in the lower keyboard is called the “Solo Split Point.”
You can adjust the Solo Split
fig.06-08.eps
NOTE
If the Solo [To Lower] is ON, the Solo voice will not be heard from the upper keyboard.
1.
Select a Solo voice (p. 50).
2.
fig.06-09.eps
Press the Solo [To Lower] button (indicator lights).
When you play the Lower keyboard, the Solo voice will sound in the range to the right of the Solo Split Point.
Lower keyboard
Solo voice
You can change how the Solo
The key used for the solo split point is included in the Solo voice range.
Solo Split Point
3.
To turn off the Solo split, press the Solo [To Lower] button
(indicator turns off).
The Solo voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard; the Solo voice will now be played in the Upper keyboard.
You can layer the Solo voice with the Lower voice so that
146
AT-500_e.book 147 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Changing How the Solo Voice Responds
When the Solo voice is assigned to the Upper keyboard or the
Lower keyboard, you can specify how the Solo voice will respond when more than one key is pressed.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Upper>.
The Upper Keyboard screen appears.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Solo Mode.
fig.09-05.eps
Layering the Solo Voice and Lower
Voice
When the Solo voice is being played by the Lower keyboard
(i.e., when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON), you can specify whether the Lower voice and the Solo voice will sound together (layered), or will sound separately (split).
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Upper>.
The Upper Keyboard screen appears.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Solo To
Lower Mode.
fig.09-07.eps
4.
Touch the Solo Mode setting (the TOP NOTE,
LAST NOTE, or POLYPHONIC indication).
fig.09-06.eps
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
TOP NOTE
LAST NOTE
POLYPHONIC
Description
The Solo voice will sound the highest note that is played for the Solo part.
The Solo voice will sound the note that was most recently played for the Solo part.
The Solo voice will sound all notes that are played for the Solo part.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
4.
Touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting to switch between “SPLIT” and “LAYER.”
Each time you touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting, it will alternate between “SPLIT” and “LAYER.”
Setting
SPLIT
LAYER
Description
The parts will sound separately.
The Lower voice and Solo voice will sound together.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
147
AT-500_e.book 148 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Changing the Solo Split Point
This setting is used to determine the Solo Split Point (lower limit of the playable range of the Solo voice) on the Lower keyboard to any desired position.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08.eps
3.
Touch < > < > to change the Solo Split
Point.
Setting
A1–C7
The key used for the solo split point is included in the Solo voice range.
4.
Touch <Exit>.
fig.06-13-2.eps
You can also set the split point by pressing the key of the lower keyboard that you want to be the Solo Split
Point.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.VoiceList.eps
2.
Touch <Split Point>.
The Split Point screen appears.
fig.06-13.eps
1.
While touching the Solo Split Point value (A1–
C7 indication) in the Split Point screen, press the key in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as the Solo Split Point.
The Solo Split Point will be set.
148
AT-500_e.book 149 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Bass Split)
By using the Bass Split you can play the bass voice in the left-hand side
(including C3) of the lower keyboard. The location at which the lower keyboard is divided in this way, to play the pedal bass voice, is called the
“Bass Split Point.” fig.06-15.eps
1.
Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 49).
You can adjust the Bass Split
2.
fig.00-06.eps
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.VoiceList.eps
3.
Touch <Pedal>.
149
AT-500_e.book 150 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Bass Split.
5.
fig.06-16.eps
Touch the Bass Split setting to switch between “ON” and
“OFF.”
Each time you touch the Bass Split setting, it will alternate ON/OFF.
When you play the Lower keyboard, the Pedal Bass voice will sound in the range to the left of (and including) the C3 note.
Pedal Bass voice
Lower keyboard
NOTE
It is not possible to select and play both Bass Split and Pedal
simultaneously.
The bass split point is included in the left-hand area of the keyboard.
Bass Split Point
6.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
If the “Bass Split” is “ON,” the
Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard. The
Pedal Bass voice will sound from the Lower keyboard.
150
AT-500_e.book 151 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Changing the Bass Split Point
You can assign the Bass Split Point (the highest key up to which the Pedal Bass voice will sound), to any key of the
Lower keyboard.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
ffig.05-08.eps
Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
3.
Touch < > < > to modify the Bass Split
Point.
Setting
A1–C7
The bass split point is included in the left-hand area of the keyboard.
4.
Touch <Exit>.
fig.06-13-3.eps
You can also set the bass split point by playing the desired key of the lower keyboard.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.VoiceList.eps
1.
While touching the Bass Split Point value (A1–
C7 indication) in the Split Point screen, press the key in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as the Bass Split Point.
The bass split point will be set.
2.
Touch <Split Point>.
The Split Point screen appears.
fig.06-13.eps
151
AT-500_e.book 152 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice
(Pedal [To Lower] Button)
By using the Pedal [To Lower] button, you can sound the Pedal Bass voice by
playing the root note (see p. 251) of a chord on the Lower keyboard in the
area that is playing the Lower voice.
fig.06-18.eps
NOTE
If no portion of the Lower keyboard is sounding the Lower voice (the [Drums/SFX] button is ON), the Pedal Bass voice will not sound.
NOTE
It is not possible to select and play both Bass Split and Pedal
[To Lower] buttons simultaneously.
1.
2.
Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 49).
Press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator lights).
When you play a chord in the area of the Lower keyboard that sounds the
Lower voice, the Pedal Bass voice will also be heard and will play the root note.
If the “Leading Bass” function is on (p. 82), the lowest note played in the lower
keyboard will sound the pedal bass voice.
3.
Press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator turns off).
The Pedal Bass voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard.
NOTE
If the Pedal [To Lower] is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard.
If no voice is selected for the lower keyboard, you can use the lower keyboard to play the pedal voice.
152
AT-500_e.book 153 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
The internal composer can record performances and play back commercial SMF music files.
The composer can be used in the following two ways.
Using the Panel Composer Buttons
fig.07-01.eps
Touching <Rec/Play> in the Main Screen to
Open the Rec/Play Screen and Using the Rec/
Play Screen’s Composer Buttons
fig.07-04.eps
Reset
Button
Play/Stop
Rec
Song
Registration
Demo
Description
Returns you to the beginning of the song.
Starts and stops playback of the song.
After the [Rec] button has been pressed, putting the composer in record standby mode, recording then starts when the
[Play/Stop] button is pressed.
The unit switches to record standby mode.
* In record standby, the [Rec] button is lit, and the [Play/Stop] button flashes.
The Song Select screen appears in the display.
The Registration Load screen appears in the display.
The Demo screen opens.
Rec
Bwd
Fwd
Button
Track
Rhythm
Accomp
Bass
Lower
Upper
Solo
Control
Reset
Stop
Play
Description
Buttons for tracks to which performances are recorded light up.
A lighted button can be toggled between lighted and unlit by pressing it. Tracks are muted when the button’s light is off.
→
For more about the track buttons, refer
Returns you to the beginning of the song.
Stops playback of the song.
Starts playback of the song.
After <Rec> has been touched to put the composer in record standby mode, recording then starts when you touch
<Play>.
The unit switches to record standby mode.
* In record standby, <Rec> is lit, and
<Play> flashes.
Rewinds the song.
Fast forwards the song.
You can toggle between display of the track buttons, the bouncing ball, or the track mute buttons by touching the button.
The Notation screen appears in the display.
The Utility screen for the Composer is displayed.
The VIMA TUNES screen is displayed.
This button is shown only in the Rec/Play
(record/play) screen.
153
AT-500_e.book 154 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
What is a Track Button?
The recorded performance will be automatically assigned to the seven Track buttons according to the recorded part. You can record or play back independently by specifying the desired
Track button; for example, when you wish to re-record a track.
fig.07-04.eps
You can record different kinds of performance data into each track:
Track
Rhythm
Accomp
Bass
Lower
Upper
Solo
Control
Recorded Performance
Rhythm performance
Drums/SFX
Manual percussion
Automatic Accompaniment (except Bass)
Pedal Bass Voice Performance Data (Note,
Bender, Modulation)
Bass part of the Automatic Accompaniment
Lower Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold,
Bender, Modulation)
Upper Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold,
Bender, Modulation)
Solo Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold,
Bender, Modulation)
Glide
Expression
Reverb Type
Reverb Depth
Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
Transpose [-] [+] button setting
[Harmony Intelligence] button (ON/OFF)
Harmony Intelligence Type
Rotary [Fast/Slow] button (ON/OFF)
Rotary [On/Off] button (ON/OFF)
Pedal Bass Mode
154
Track
Control
Recorded Performance
Solo Mode
Solo To Lower Mode
Solo Split Point
Bass Split (ON/OFF)
Bass Split Point
Sustain ON/OFF
Sustain Length
Initial Touch
Vintage Organ Setting
Wall Type
The Voices assigned for each part
Level [
▲
][
▼
] button (Part Balance Volume)
The Reverb depth for each part
The Chorus settings (ON/OFF) of the voice
The Octave shift settings for each part
[Drums/SFX] button (ON/OFF)
Drums/SFX Set
[Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF)
Manual Percussion Set
Chord Intelligence
Chord Hold
Leading Bass
Lower Voice Hold (ON/OFF)
Tempo setting
Volume of the Rhythm Accompaniment part
Reverb depth of the Rhythm Accompaniment part
Volume of the Rhythm drum part
Reverb depth of the Rhythm drum part
Volume of the Rhythm bass part
Reverb depth of the Rhythm bass part
More information about the track assignments when playing commercial SMF music files, please refer to
“Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute
Buttons When Playing Back Commercial SMF Music Files”
AT-500_e.book 155 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
During recording, the control track will store the operations as follows.
• Recording panel operations (Voice selections, Tempo changes, etc.)
Newly recorded performance data will be added without erasing the previously recorded data.
• Recording expression pedal operations
This will depend on the function of the expression pedal.
Recording of expression operations will differ depending on the setting for “Exp. Src (Rec).”
For details refer to “Changing the Function of the
If you wish to erase all the recorded data and record new performance data, use the editing function “Erase” (erase
performance data) to erase the data (p. 167).
Displaying the Track Buttons
The track buttons will be displayed in the screen when you record or play back a performance.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08.eps
The Rec/Play screen appears.
The following buttons are referred to as the track buttons.
fig.07-04.eps
All accompaniment data is grouped to the “Accomp” track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the
Rhythm performance data is grouped to “Rhythm.”
If you want to mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch
off the Track Mute buttons there (p. 159).
155
AT-500_e.book 156 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Playing Back Performance
Songs Stored on USB Memory and SMF Music Files
In addition to playing back the music you recorded on the instrument and saved to a USB memory, ATELIER also lets you enjoy a wide variety of commercially available song files, such as defined below.
SMF Music Files
SMF (Standard MIDI File) is a data format that was created in order to standardize music data formats between manufacturers. Collections of songs in SMF music files are commercially available in a wide range of styles for enjoyment, as accompaniment for practicing musical instruments, and for karaoke.
If you want to purchase SMF music files, you can contact the dealer where you purchased the ATELIER.
2.
Press the [Song] button.
fig.07-09.eps
The Song Select screen appears.
fig.07-10.eps
To Play Back Only One Song
1.
Prepare the song that you want to play back.
If you want to play a song from USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector.
If you want to play a song from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.
When the performance song loaded from a USB memory is a Standard MIDI File, “ displayed on the Main screen.
fig.07-06.eps
” will be
3.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
If you want to play a song from USB memory, choose
“Ext Memory.” If you want to play a song from floppy disk, choose “Disk.”
4.
In the screen, touch < > < > to select the song that you wish to play back.
5.
Touch < song.
> ( ) to play back the
6.
Touch < > ( ) to stop the song.
You can also play back or stop the music files by touching
<Play> or <Stop> in the Rec/Play screen. By touching
<Bwd> or <Fwd> you can rewind or fast-forward the performance.
156
AT-500_e.book 157 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Playing Back All Performance Data
1.
Prepare the song that you want to play back.
If you want to play a song from USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector.
If you want to play a song from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.
2.
While holding down the [Song] button, press the [Play/Stop] button.
fig.01-01.eps
All performance data saved on the USB memory or floppy disk will be played consecutively.
3.
To stop playback, press the [Play/Stop] button.
fig.07-08.eps
If you wish to erase the performance song
1.
Touch <Cancel>.
Save the song to USB memory or a floppy disk (p. 169).
Silencing a Specific Track
(Track Mute)
When the Rec/Play screen is displayed, the track button will light to indicate a track in which a performance has been recorded. By turning off these track buttons, you can temporarily silence the sound. This is referred to as “Track
Mute.”
If you want to play back a song from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector before you continue.
If you want to play back a song from floppy disk, connect your floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.
1.
Press the [Song] button.
The Song Select screen appears.
fig.07-31.eps
If Internal Memory Contains
Performance Data that has not been
Saved
If internal memory contains performance data that has not been saved to USB memory or the Favorites (user memory), the message “The song will be erased. OK?” will appear.
If you wish to erase the performance song
1.
Touch <OK>.
2.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
Choose “Favorites” if you want to play back a song from user memory, choose “Ext Memory” if you want to play back a song from USB memory, or choose “Disk” if you want to play back a song from floppy disk.
3.
Touch < > < > to select the song that you wish to play back.
157
AT-500_e.book 158 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
4.
Touch <Load> to load the song.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04-2.eps
Correspondence Between Track Buttons and
Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back
Commercial SMF Music Files
Track button
Rhythm
Accomp
Bass
Lower
Upper
Solo
3
4
1
Channel
10
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
2
All accompaniment data is grouped to the “Accomp” track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the
Rhythm performance data is grouped to “Rhythm.”
If you want to mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch
off the Track Mute buttons there (p. 159).
5.
Press a track button that is lit, extinguishing the button.
When you play back the performance, track buttons that are not lighted will be muted (silenced).
fig.07-14-3.eps
Correspondence Between Track Buttons and
Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back
Performance Data Created with a Music
ATELIER
Track button
Rhythm
Accomp
Bass
Lower
Upper
Solo
Track Mute button
10, 11 (Drums/SFX),
13 (Manual Percussion)
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14, 15
2 (Bass)
3 (Lower)
4 (Upper)
1 (Solo)
6.
Press the track button once again (button lights).
The part that had been muted will return to normal and will be heard.
158
AT-500_e.book 159 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Muting Individual Tracks of
Performance Data
All accompaniment data is grouped to the “Accomp” track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the Rhythm performance data is grouped to “Rhythm.”
You can mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment on the Track Mute screen.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04-2.eps
2.
Touch < > a number of times.
The Track Mute screen appears.
Sixteen Track Mute buttons appear in the display.
From the left, these are “Track 1, Track 2 ... Track 15, and Track 16.” fig.09-22.eps
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
4.
When you touch an unlit track button, the track button lights up, indicating muting of the track is cancelled.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
Track mute will be cancelled if you choose other performance data.
The seven Track buttons in the Rec/Play screen (p. 154)
correspond to the sixteen Track Mute buttons of the Track Mute screen as shown below.
Commercial SMF Music Files
Track Mute Button
1 (Solo) Solo
2 (Pedal)
3 (Lower)
4 (Upper)
5–9, 11–16 (Accmp)
10 (Rhythm)
Pedal
Lower
Upper
Accomp
Rhythm
Track Button
3.
Touch the screen to select the track that you wish to mute.
fig.09-22-2.eps
Performance Data Created on the ATELIER
Track Mute Button Track Button
1 (Solo) Solo
2 (Pedal)
3 (Lower)
4 (Upper)
5–9, 12, 14, 15 (Accmp)
10 (Rhythm)
11 (Drums/SFX)
13 (Manual Percussion)
Pedal
Lower
Upper
Accomp
Rhythm
* The Track Mute button 16 cannot be used with performance data created on an ATELIER.
The button you’ve touched goes out, indicating the sound is muted.
159
AT-500_e.book 160 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Viewing a Notation
You can display the notations of performances from SMF music files and recordings made on the ATELIER. This is very convenient when you want to read the music as you play and to confirm recorded songs.
Selecting Songs
→
There is no need to select the song when displaying notations for performances recorded with the Composer.
Start from Step 6.
1.
Prepare the USB memory or floppy disk that contains the song for which you want to view the notation.
If you want to view the notation for a song in USB memory, connect your USB memory to the External
Memory connector before you continue.
If you want to view the notation for a song in floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.
2.
Press the [Song] button.
The Song Select screen appears.
fig.07-31-2.eps
Displaying Notations
6.
Touch <DigiScore> on the Rec/Play screen.
The Notation screen appears.
fig.07-38.eps
Display Description
Enlarge the notation display.
Display lyrics in the notation.
Display the Bass part notation.
Display the Lower part notation.
Display the Upper part notation.
Display the Upper part and Lower part notations.
You can change the part that is displayed, and change the way in which the notation is
3.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
If you want to view the notation for a song in user memory, select “Favorites.”
If you want to view the notation for a song in USB memory, select “Ext Memory.”
If you want to view the notation for a song in floppy disk, select “Disk.”
4.
Touch < > < > to select the song whose notation is to be displayed.
5.
Touch <Load>.
After the song is loaded, the Rec/Play screen appears.
160
AT-500_e.book 161 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Changing the Notation Settings
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main Screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04-1.eps
2.
The Notation screen appears.
fig.07-38.eps
3.
Touch <DigiScore>.
Touch <Option>.
The Notation Options screen appears.
fig.07-39.eps
fig.07-40.eps
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
4.
Touch the value setting button for the item whose setting you want to change.
Menu
Pitches
Clef Upper
Clef Lower
Key
Upper Part
Lower Part
Bass Part
Setting
OFF
C,D,E
Do,Re,Mi
AUTO
G Clef
F Clef
AUTO
G Clef
F Clef
Description
Not displayed
Letter names (fixed do) are display in the detailed notation.
Solmization syllables (movable do) are displayed in the detailed notation.
Display is switched automatically.
Displayed the G-clef staff of the upper part.
Displayed the F-clef staff of the upper part.
Display is switched automatically.
Displayed the G-clef staff of the lower part.
Displayed the F-clef staff of the lower part.
Key is switched automatically.
AUTO
Db, Ab,
Eb, Bb, F,
C, G, D, A,
E, B, F#,
Bbm, Fm,
Cm, Gm,
Dm, Am,
Em, Bm,
F#m, C#m,
G#m, D#m
Display the notation in the selected key.
1–16
1–16
1–16
Select the part to be displayed as the upper part.
Select the part to be displayed as the lower part.
Select the part to be displayed as the bass part.
161
AT-500_e.book 162 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
fig.07-42.eps
When you touch Key setting button, the following screen appears.
fig.07-41-1.eps
fig.07-41-2.eps
Some Notes on a Notation Screen
• When you start playback of music files, the marks appears. While this appears on the notation, the ATELIER is reading data. Please wait until reading of the data is complete.
• In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.
• The notations that are presented by the display are produced based on the music files. Viewing ease is given priority over precise expression when dealing with complex, high-level music. Because of this, you may find that the notation shown in the display does not match what is provided on commercially available sheet music.
The notation display feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation. In addition, the display cannot show notes that are briefer than a sixteenth note.
• If you select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will not be displayed in the notation. Use
<Option> to change the part that is displayed.
• If you use the buttons located below the display to change the displayed part while the song is playing, the song may be played back from the beginning.
The Key screen is composed of two screens. Touch
< > to switch between the two screens.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
162
AT-500_e.book 163 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Recording a Performance
You can record the performance that you play. You can also record your performance while playing Rhythms or Automatic
Accompaniment.
fig.07-12.eps
Caution
If you press the [Rec] button when a song has been selected from the USB memory or floppy disk, the selected song will be completely loaded into the ATELIER and the Composer will enter into the recording standby mode. To record a new song, use the following procedure.
1.
Press the [Rec] button to cancel recording standby.
2.
Disconnect the external media.
If you’ve connected USB memory, disconnect the USB memory from the external memory connector. If you’re using a floppy disk, remove the floppy disk from the disk drive.
3.
Delete the performance data (p. 167).
Re-record your performance.
fig.07-12-2.eps
3, 4 2
1.
Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.
2.
Enter the recording standby mode by pressing the [Rec] button.
The [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/Stop] button will blink.
3.
Press the [Play/Stop] button to start recording.
When you press the [Play/Stop] button, the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.
If you wish to use Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment as you record, press the [Start/Stop] button instead of the
[Play/Stop] button to begin recording. Also, if the [Sync
Start] button is lit (i.e., if Sync Start is ON), recording will begin the instant you play the Lower keyboard.
4.
Press the [Play/Stop] button when you have completed your recording.
The Track indicator where a performance song is recorded will change from a flashing to a constant light.
When you press the [Intro/Ending] button (or [Start/
Stop] button) while recording a Rhythm performance or
Automatic Accompaniment, the Rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment will stop. However, the recording itself will continue. Press the [Play/Stop] button to stop recording.
The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression
You can also choose to cancel the metronome count-in
before recording starts (p. 207).
If the following screen appears
fig.E-30.eps
When recording was automatically canceled because the memory limit was reached.
163
AT-500_e.book 164 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Playing Back a Performance
Song
Here’s how to play back a performance you’ve recorded.
fig.07-08-2.eps*
1.
ig.05-08.eps
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04-2.eps
4.
To stop playback at any point, touch <Stop>.
You can also stop playback by pressing the Composer
[Play/Stop] button.
The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression
NOTE
You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will affect the playback and what you play while ATELIER music
file is being played back (p. 200).
If you load performance data (such as SMF music files) that was not designed for an ATELIER Series instrument and play it back, you may find, when playing Rhythms and Automatic
Accompaniment, that the music doesn’t sound quite like it should (For example, the wrong sounds could be played). If you want the data to be played back accurately, first press the [Reset] button prior to playback.
Add a Count Sound to Match the Timing (Count In)
In cases such as when you want to perform in time with a song, you can have a count sound played before playback of the song begins, allowing you to synchronize your own performance with the song.
Playing back a song after playing the count sound is called
“Count In.”
1.
Hold down the [Reset] button and press the
[Play/Stop] button.
The metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.
2.
Touch <Reset>.
The location at which playback will start will return to the beginning of measure 1.
If you wish to begin playback from the middle of the song, touch <Bwd> <Fwd> to move to the measure from which you wish to begin playback.
3.
Touch <Play> to begin playback.
After playback reaches the end of the performance, it will stop automatically.
You can also begin playback by pressing the Composer
[Play/Stop] button.
164
AT-500_e.book 165 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording Each Part Separately
In this method, each part (track button) is recorded one after another: first the Rhythm part, then the bass part, etc. If there are any previously recorded performances, you can listen to them as you record additional parts.
1.
Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04-2.eps
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
5.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Play> to begin recording.
When you touch <Play> in the Rec/Play screen, the metronome will sound a two-measure count, and then recording will begin.
As you listen to the performance song previously recorded, record the Part into a new Track.
You can also start recording by pressing the Composer
[Play/Stop] button.
6.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Stop> to stop recording.
The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit.
You can also stop recording by pressing the Composer
[Play/Stop] button.
7.
Repeat steps 3–6 to record each part.
3.
Touch <Bwd> and <Fwd> to select the desired measure (bar) when you start recording.
If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song, touch <Reset>.
4.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Rec> to enter recording-standby mode.
<Play> and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The track buttons that are already recorded will light.
fig.07-15.eps
blink
Also, the [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/
Stop] button will blink.
You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the
Composer [Rec] button.
165
AT-500_e.book 166 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Re-Recording
If you made a mistake in your performance during recording etc., you can re-record just a portion of the musical data in the track.
NOTE
If you wish to re-record with different settings for voices,
tempo, part balance, erase the recorded song (p. 167) and
re-record again. If the Control track still contains data from before you re-recorded, the volume or sounds may change during playback.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04-2.eps
2.
Touch <Bwd> and <Fwd> to select the desired measure (bar) when you start recording.
If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song, touch <Reset>.
3.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Rec> to enter recording-standby mode.
<Play> and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light.
fig.07-15.eps
lit blink
4.
Touch the Track button which you wish to rerecording (button flashes).
The song data of the specified Track (with the exception of the Control Track) will be erased as new song data is recorded.
When the Track button is lit constantly, no song data has been recorded on that Track.
5.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Play> to begin recording.
The metronome will sound a two-measure count, and then recording will begin.
You can also start recording by pressing the [Play/Stop] button.
6.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Stop> to stop recording.
The track buttons which were re-recorded will change from flashing to being constantly lit.
You can also stop recording by pressing the [Play/Stop] button.
NOTE
If you wish to keep the existing Expression Pedal data, and record only the panel operations, you can make settings to prevent the operation of the Expression Pedal from being
You can use punch-in recording (p. 174) to re-record only
the area that you specify.
166
Also, the [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/
Stop] button will blink.
You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the
[Rec] button.
AT-500_e.book 167 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Erasing a Performance Song
(Song Clear)
If you wish to discard your recording and re-record from the beginning, or if you wish to record a new performance, you must erase the previously-recorded data.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04-2.eps
You can also use the following method to open the
Song Clear screen.
1.
Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen to display the Quick Guide screen.
2.
Press the [Song] button.
The Song Clear screen appears.
Changing the Name of a
Performance Song (Rename)
A name is automatically assigned to a performance song that you record. However, at some point you may wish to change the name to something more meaningful.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04-2.eps
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-22-2.eps
3.
Touch <Song Clear>.
The following message, asking you to confirm your choice, will be displayed.
fig.E-62.eps
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-22-2.eps
If you touch <Cancel>, the performance data will not be erased, and you will return to the Rec/Play screen.
4.
If you touch <OK>, the performance data will be erased.
167
AT-500_e.book 168 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
3.
Touch <Save/Delete>.
The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.
fig.07-23.eps
4.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-24.eps
7.
Touch the screen to specify the desired character.
The following characters can be selected.
Uppercase
Lowercase
Symbols
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
! “ # % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
Deletes a character.
Inserts a space (blank).
Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
8.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<OK>.
The new name is now inserted.
fig.07-26.eps
5.
Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
fig.07-25.eps
6.
Touch the character select button ( to switch among uppercase/lowercase/ symbols.
Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase
→ lowercase
→ symbols
→ uppercase...
)
NOTE
You cannot directly change or edit the name of a performance song stored on a USB memory or floppy disk.
The song must first be loaded (p. 170) into the instrument,
edited, and then saved to USB memory or floppy disk again.
You can also access the Rename screen as follows.
1.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rec/Play screen.
The Utility screen appears.
2.
In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
3.
Touch <Rename> on the Edit Menu screen.
The Rename screen appears.
168
AT-500_e.book 169 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Saving Performance Songs
The performance data that you recorded will disappear when the power of the ATELIER is turned off. If you wish to keep the performance data, you can save it on a USB memory, floppy disk, or “Favorites” (user memory).
If the recorded performance data has not been saved, the display will show the “ ” symbol. This symbol will disappear when you save the performance data.
1.
Prepare to save the performance song.
If you want to save performance song to a USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.
If you want to save performance song to a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.
Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER.
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04-2.eps
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
4.
Touch <Save/Delete>.
The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.
fig.07-28-2.eps
5.
Touch < > < > to select the savedestination media.
Select “Ext Memory” to save the data in USB memory, select “Disk” to save it on a floppy disk, or “Favorites” to save it in user memory.
6.
Touch < > < > to select the number of the save destination.
If the save destination contains no data, the screen will indicate
“
- - - - -.” fig.07-28-2.eps
3.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-22-2.eps
To cancel the Save operation, touch <Exit> to close the
Song Save/Song Delete screen.
7.
Touch <Save>.
The Save Format screen appears.
fig.07-29.eps
169
AT-500_e.book 170 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
8.
Touch the screen to select the format in which the data will be saved.
You can select either “Original” or “SMF” format.
Display
Original
SMF
Description
Save data in ATELIER format
Saving in SMF Format for ATELIER Sound Modules
9.
NOTE
NOTE
Touch <OK> to finalize the save format.
Saving of the performance data will begin.
Performance data saved by the ATELIER cannot be played back properly by the sound generator of an instrument that is not a member of the ATELIER series.
Saving performance data in SMF format (SMF) requires a longer time than saving it in ATELIER format (
Original
).
If the Following Screen Appears
If you select a number at which a performance data has already been saved and touch <Save>, the following screen appears.
fig.E-64-b.eps
Loading Performance Songs
Into the ATELIER
To edit (p. 179) or re-record a performance song that is stored
on a USB memory or floppy disk, you must first load that song into the instrument.
1.
Prepare the performance song.
If you want to load performance song to a USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector.
If you want to load performance song to a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.
Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER.
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
3.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
4.
Touch <Song Select>.
The Song Select screen appears.
fig.07-31.eps
If you wish to update the contents of the performance data
1.
Touch <OK>.
If you want to save your performance as new data without overwriting the existing data
1.
2.
Touch <Cancel> to stop the Save operation.
In the Song Save/Song Delete screen, select the number that is displayed as “-----” (a number that currently does not contain performance data).
3.
Touch <Save>.
When saving is complete, the saved performance name will be displayed.
5.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
If you want to load a song from USB memory, choose
“Ext Memory.” If you want to load a song from floppy disk, choose “Disk.”
6.
Touch < > < > to select the performance song that you wish to load into internal memory.
170
AT-500_e.book 171 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
7.
Touch <Load>.
fig.07-31.eps
The selected performance data will be loaded into internal memory.
If the Following Screen Appears
The message below is shown when the performance song in the unit has not been saved to USB memory or Favorites (User
Memory).
fig.E-62.eps
Deleting Performance Songs
Stored on “Favorites” or the
USB Memory
You can delete a performance song that was saved onto a
“Favorites,” USB memory, or floppy disk.
If you want to delete a song in USB memory, connect your
USB memory to the External Memory connector before you continue.
If you want to delete a song in floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Save/Delete>.
The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.
fig.07-23.eps
If you wish to erase the performance song
1.
Touch <OK>.
If you wish to erase the performance song
1.
Touch <Cancel>.
Save the song to USB memory or a floppy disk (p. 169).
If loading is canceled because the memory limit has been reached, the following message will be displayed: fig.E-30.eps
4.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
If you want to delete a song from the user memory, choose “Favorites.” If you want to delete a song from
USB memory, choose “Ext Memory.” If you want to delete a song from floppy disk, choose “Disk.”
5.
Touch < > < > to select the performance data that you wish to delete.
171
AT-500_e.book 172 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
6.
Touch <Delete>.
The confirmation message appears.
fig.07-30.eps
If you touch <Cancel> the performance data will not be deleted, and you will return to the Rec/Play screen.
7.
When you touch <OK> the performance data will be deleted.
Layering a New Recording onto SMF Music Files
You can load commercially available SMF music files into the
ATELIER, and record your own performance on top of it.
During recording, the data you’ve loaded will be played back, while you record your performance.
1.
Prepare the SMF music files.
If you’re using SMF music files from USB memory, connect it to the external memory connector.
If you’re using SMF music files from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
3.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
4.
Touch <Song Select>.
The Song Select screen appears.
fig.07-31.eps
5.
Touch < > < > to select the desired media.
If you want to play SMF music files from User Memory, choose “Favorites.” If you want to play SMF music files from USB memory, choose “Ext Memory.” If you want to play SMF music files from floppy disk, choose “Disk.”
6.
Touch < > < > to select the SMF music files that you wish to load into internal memory.
172
AT-500_e.book 173 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
7.
Touch <Load>.
fig.07-31.eps
NOTE
The performance data you recorded can be saved on a USB
memory, “Favorites,” or floppy disk (p. 169).
Commercially sold music files can also be loaded into the
ATELIER, but for reasons of copyright protection, cannot be saved in SMF format.
The selected performance data will be loaded into internal memory.
For track assignments of SMF format performance data
loaded to the ATELIER, refer to p. 158.
8.
Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.
9.
Touch <Bwd> and <Fwd> to move to the desired measure (bar) at which you wish to begin recording.
10.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Rec> to enter recording-standby mode.
<Play> and unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light.
Also, the panel [Rec] button indicator will light, and the
[Play/Stop] button will blink.
You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the
[Rec] button.
11.
Touch the Track button which you wish to recording (button flashes).
12.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Play> to begin recording.
As you record, the music file that was loaded into the
ATELIER will play back.
13.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Stop> to stop recording.
The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit.
You can also start and stop recording by pressing the
[Play/Stop] button.
Using Song with a Different Tempo
Than That of the Performance Song
1.
Prepare the performance data whose tempo you want to change.
If you’re using performance data from USB memory, connect it to the External Memory connector.
If you’re using performance data from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.
2.
Load the performance data into the unit
3.
Determine the tempo with the Tempo [ ] [ ] buttons.
4.
Hold down the panel [Reset] button and press the [Rec] button.
The tempo of the performance data will change.
NOTE
You cannot carry out this operation with <Reset> and <Rec> in the Rec/Play screen.
173
AT-500_e.book 174 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Re-Recording Part of Your
Performance (Punch-in Recording)
After you have recorded a performance, you can re-record a specified portion of the performance.
With this method, you listen to the recorded performance, and re-record just the desired area. This recording method is called
“Punch-in Recording.”
To Specify the Segment to be Recorded
Over Again
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Punch In/Out>.
The Punch In/Out screen appears.
fig.07-33.eps
4.
Touch the “From” value (the measure at which recording will begin).
fig.07-34.eps
6.
Touch <Exit>.
7.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures that will be re-recorded).
8.
Touch < > < > to set “For” (the number of measures that will be re-recorded).
9.
Touch <Exit>.
10.
Touch <Rec>.
The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in recording standby.
To Record While Listening to the Song
11.
Press the Track button which you wish to rerecord (indicator flashes).
12.
Touch <Play> to begin recording.
When you touch <Play>, the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.
When you reach the first measure of the specified area, recording will begin. When the specified area ends, recording will end, and playback will resume.
While the song is playing back or recording, the [Rec] button’s indicator will be lit as follows.
[Rec] button’s indicator
Flash
Light constantly
Description
While the performance is playing back
While you are re-recording
When recording has ended for the specified area and the data is once again playing back, the [Rec] button’s indicator will resume flashing.
13.
Touch <Stop> to stop the recording.
The indicator of the track button which recorded the performance will light.
5.
Touch < > < > to specify “From” (the measure at which recording will begin).
174
AT-500_e.book 175 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording and Layering Drum
Parts (Loop Recording)
You can repeatedly record over a specified region of the
Rhythm part, adding additional notes at each pass. This type of recording is called “Loop Recording.”
This recording method is convenient when you wish to layer drum sounds individually for the Rhythm part.
NOTE
“Loop Recording” can be used only when recording the
Rhythm part.
1.
Press the [Drums/SFX] button or the [Manual
Percussion] button to select a Drum Set or
Sound Effect Set (p. 66–p. 69).
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
3.
Touch <Bwd> and <Fwd> on the Rec/Play screen, move to the measure where you wish to start Loop Recording.
4.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-22.eps
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
6.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures that will be recorded repeatedly).
fig.07-36.eps
To cancel operation, touch <Exit>.
7.
Touch < > < > to specify the “For” value
(the number of measures that will be recorded repeatedly).
8.
Touch <Exit>.
9.
Touch <Rec>.
The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in recording standby.
10.
Touch <Play> to begin recording.
When you touch <Play>, the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.
You can record repeatedly over the specified range of measures, adding additional notes at each pass.
11.
Touch <Stop> to stop playback.
The indicator of the Rhythm track button which recorded the performance will light.
5.
Touch <Loop Rec>.
The Loop Rec screen appears.
fig.07-35.eps
175
AT-500_e.book 176 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Starting Recording at the Right
Moment (Count-In Recording)
This setting (ON/OFF) determines whether or not a metronome count-in (2 measures) will be heard after pressing the [Play/Stop] button on recording.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04.eps
5.
Touch the Count-In Rec setting (ON/OFF) to switch it between “ON/OFF.”
Each time you touch the Count-In Rec setting, it will alternate between ON/OFF.
Setting
ON
OFF
Description
A two-measure count will sound before recording
No count will sound before recording
6.
Touch <Exit>.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-22.eps
3.
Touch <Options>.
fig.03-37.eps
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Count-In
Rec.
176
AT-500_e.book 177 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
6.
Touch <Copy> (Song Copy).
The following screen appears.
Copying Performance Song
Performance songs and SMF music files from USB memory or floppy disk can be copied to “Favorites” (user memory).
If a performance song saved in USB memory or on a floppy disk is stored in “Favorites,” the stored performance song will not disappear even when you turn off the power. It is convenient to load frequently-used performance song into
“Favorites.”
Performance songs saved in “Favorites” can also be copied to
USB memory or floppy disk.
Copying Performance Songs from USB
Memory to “Favorites”
1.
Connecting the USB memory to the External
Memory connector.
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
3.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
4.
Touch <Song Select>.
The Song Select screen appears.
7.
Touch < > < > to select the media (the location of the performance song you want to copy).
If you want to copy a performance song from USB memory, select “Ext Memory.”
If you want to copy a performance song from floppy disk, select “Disk.”
8.
Touch < > < > to select the performance song you want to copy.
If you choose <Copy All>, all performance data stored in the currently selected folder of the USB memory or floppy disk will be copied in a single operation.
9.
Touch Favorites < > < > to select the copy-destination number.
Numbers for which a song name is shown already have a song saved to them.
10.
Touch <Execute>.
The copying of the song to “Favorites” begins.
When copying ends, the “- - - - -” in the screen will change to the song name that you copied.
If you select a number in which a song is already saved, a screen like the following will appear.
5.
Touch <File Edit>.
The Song File Edit screen appears.
If you want to delete the previously saved song and overwrite it with the song you’re newly saving, touch
<OK>.
If you don’t want to delete the previously saved song, touch <Cancel>, then select a number at which no song has been saved, and copy the song to that number.
177
AT-500_e.book 178 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Copying Performance Songs from
“Favorites” to USB Memory
You can copy performance song from “Favorites” to USB memory.
In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the
“Song File Copy screen” in step 6 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards. In this state, you’ll be copying performance song from “Favorites” to USB memory.
The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying performance song from USB memory to “Favorites.”
178
AT-500_e.book 179 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Editing Your Musical Performance Data
Song files that you record can be edited using five different functions.
The following editing functions are provided.
Delete Measure
Delete Track
Erase Event
Copy
Menu
Quantize
Rename
Description Page
Deleting a Specific Measure.
Delete the Recording from a
Track.
Erase a specified portion of the performance in a specified area.
Copying Measures.
Correct Timing Inaccuracies.
Change the name of the performance data.
NOTE
Once you edit data, it cannot be restored to its original condition. As a precaution against accidents, we recommend that you save your song to a USB memory
2.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to open the Utility screen.
fig.08-03.eps0
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
fig.08-08.eps
Deleting a Specific Measure
(Delete Measure)
You can delete a portion of the performance data. This function lets you delete specified measures (bars) of the song from all tracks. When any part of the song file is deleted, subsequent recording will be moved forward to fill the gap.
Example: To delete measures (bars) 5–8 fig.08-01.eps
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4.
Touch <Delete Measure>.
fig.08-04-2.eps
1 2 3 4 5 6
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.08-02.eps
The Delete Measure screen appears.
fig.08-04-a.eps
179
AT-500_e.book 180 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Editing Your Musical Performance Data
5.
Touch the “From” value (the first measure that you wish to delete).
6.
Touch < > < > to set “From” (the first measure that you wish to delete).
fig.08-05.eps
Delete the Recording from a
Track (Delete Track)
The ATELIER has seven tracks. This function lets you delete the recording from a track that you specify.
For more on the content stored on each track, refer to p.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.08-02.eps
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
8.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures that you wish to delete).
9.
Touch < > < > to set “For” (the number of measures that you wish to delete).
To delete to the last measure, select “ALL.”
10.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
11.
Touch <Execute>.
The following display appears.
fig.08-06.eps
2.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to open the Utility screen.
fig.08-03.eps
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
fig.08-08-a.eps
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
12.
Touch <OK> to delete the measures.
When deletion has been completed, you are returned to the Delete Measure screen.
180
AT-500_e.book 181 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
4.
Touch <Delete Track>.
fig.08-08.eps
Editing Your Musical Performance Data
8.
Touch <Execute>.
The following display appears.
fig.08-22.eps
The Delete Track (delete the performance data of a track) screen appears.
fig.08-08-2.eps
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
9.
Touch <OK> to delete the performance data.
When the recording has been deleted, the Delete Track screen will reappear.
5.
Touch the “Track” value (the track whose performance data you wish to delete).
6.
Touch < > < > to select the “Track” (the track whose performance data you wish to delete).
fig.08-09.eps
Setting
RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO,
CONTROL
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
181
AT-500_e.book 182 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Editing Your Musical Performance Data
Erase Recording (Erase Event)
You can erase a specified portion of the performance in a specified area without making the song shorter. This is called the “Erase” function.
As an alternative to the method of erasing all performance data in a specified area, you can erase the following contents of the performance.
Setting
ALL
NOTE
PANEL
EXPRESSION
VOICE
TEMPO
Description
All recording
Notes played on the keyboard
Panel operations,
Content Saved to the Control Track
(Information Other than Expression,
Voice, and Tempo Data)
→
Expression pedal recording
Voice settings
Tempo setting
Example: Erasing measures (bars) 5–8
fig.08-10.eps
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to open the Utility screen.
fig.08-03.eps
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
fig.08-08-a.eps
4.
Touch <Erase Event>.
fig.08-11-2.eps
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 blank measures
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.08-02.eps
The Erase Event screen appears.
fig.08-11.eps
182
AT-500_e.book 183 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
5.
Touch the “Event” value (the type of performance data that you wish to erase).
6.
Touch < > < > to specify the “Event” (the type of performance data that you wish to erase).
fig.08-12.eps
Editing Your Musical Performance Data
14.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures from which the data will be erased).
15.
Touch < > < > to set “For” (the number of measures from which the data will be erased).
If you wish to erase to the last measure (bar), set “for:
ALL.”
16.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
17.
Touch <Execute>.
The following display appears.
fig.08-23.eps
Setting
ALL, NOTE, PANEL, EXPRESSION, VOICE, TEMPO
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
8.
Touch the “Track” value (the track from which data will be erased).
9.
Touch < > < > to specify the “Track” (the track from which data will be erased).
If you have selected EXPRESSION, VOICE and TEMPO as the type of recording to be erased, you need not specify the track.
Track
ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO,
CONTROL
If you select “ALL,” the recording will be erased from all parts.
10.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
11.
Touch the “From” value (the measure at which erasure will begin).
12.
Touch < > < > to set “From” (the measure at which erasure will begin).
13.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
18.
Touch <OK> to erase the performance data.
Once the performance data has been erased, you are returned to the Erase Event screen.
183
AT-500_e.book 184 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Editing Your Musical Performance Data
Copying Measures (Copy)
This function lets you copy a portion of recorded song to a different measure (bar) location in the same track.
If a recording already exists at the copy destination, it will be erased.
Example: To copy measures (bars) 5–7 to measure (bar) 8
fig.08-13.eps
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4.
Touch <Copy>.
fig.08-14-2.eps
The Copy screen appears.
fig.08-14.eps
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.08-02.eps
2.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to open the Utility screen.
fig.08-03.eps
5.
Touch the “Track” value (the track to be copied).
6.
Touch < > < > to set “Track” (the track to be copied).
fig.08-15-2.eps
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
fig.08-08-a.eps
Track
ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO,
CONTROL
If you select “ALL,” the recording in all the tracks will be copied.
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
8.
Touch the “From” value (the measure at which copying will begin).
184
AT-500_e.book 185 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Editing Your Musical Performance Data
9.
Touch < > < > to set “From” (the measure at which copying will begin).
10.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
11.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures to be copied).
12.
Touch < > < > to set “For” (the number of measures to be copied).
If you want to specify all of the data up to the final measure, select “ALL.”
13.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
14.
Touch the “To” value (the copy-destination measure number).
15.
Touch < > < > to set “To” (the copydestination measure number).
If you select “END,” the data will be copied following the end of the last measure.
16.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
17.
Touch the “Time” value (the number of times that the data will be copied).
18.
Touch < > < > to set “Time” (the number of times that the data will be copied).
19.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
20.
Touch <Execute>.
The following display appears.
fig.08-24.eps
Correct Timing Inaccuracies
(Quantize)
You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded performance by having the music be aligned with a timing you specify. This is called “Quantizing.”
For example even if you intend to play at quarter-note timing, the notes may be slightly earlier or later than precise quarternote intervals. In this case, if you quantize at quarter-note timing, you can correctly match the Rhythms.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.08-02.eps
2.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch < to open the Utility screen.
fig.08-03.eps
> (Utility)
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
fig.08-08_50
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
21.
Touch <OK> to copy the measures.
Once the measures have been copied, you are returned to the Copy screen.
185
AT-500_e.book 186 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Editing Your Musical Performance Data
4.
Touch <Quantize>.
fig.08-17-2.eps
The Quantize screen appears.
fig.08-17.eps
10.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
11.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures that will be quantized).
12.
Touch < > < > to set “For” (the number of measures that will be quantized).
To specify everything through to the last measure, set
“for: ALL.”
13.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
14.
Touch the “Resolution” value (the resolution at which notes will be aligned).
15.
Touch the screen to set “Resolution” (the resolution at which notes will be aligned).
The “Resolution” (the timing to which notes are aligned) can be set to one of the following settings.
fig.08-20.eps
Half note Quarter note Quarter note triplet
5.
Touch the “Track” value (the track that will be quantized).
6.
Touch < > < > to specify the “Track” (the track that will be quantized).
fig.08-18.eps
8th note 8th note triplet 16th note
16 note triplet 32th note
16.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
17.
Touch <Execute>.
The following display appears.
fig.08-25.eps
Track
ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO
If you select “ALL,” the recording in all the tracks will be quantized.
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
8.
Touch the “From” value (the measure at which quantization will begin).
9.
Touch < > < > to set “From” (the measure at which quantization will begin).
186
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
18.
Touch <OK> to have the quantization carried out.
When the quantizing is finished, you are returned to the
Quantize screen.
AT-500_e.book 187 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
You can create a Rhythm for use when Rhythm Mode is set to “S-SERIES” (p.
An original Rhythm of your own is created by starting with one of the internal
Rhythms, then modifying it. You can edit some of the internal Rhythms to create your own original Rhythms. These original Rhythms are called “User
Rhythms.” This function is called “Rhythm Customize.”
Process for Creating User Rhythms
fig.RC_steps.eps
Preparations for Creating User Rhythms
Open the Rhythm Customize screen
Select the division
Load the source Rhythm
Make the division settings
Creating the User Rhythm
Edit the Rhythm
Change the percussion
Saving the User Rhythm
Changing the name of a User Rhythm
Save the User Rhythm to the User Memory or USB Memory
Change the Rhythm tempo
Copying the User Rhythm
• Copy User Rhythm on USB Memory to the User Memory
• Copy User Rhythm on User Memory to the USB Memory
187
AT-500_e.book 188 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
Preparations for Creating
User Rhythms
Displaying the Rhythm Customize Screen
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
fig.02-09.eps
3
6
When calling up a source
14 1
4 5
2
4
7 8
2.
In the Rhythm screen, touch <
The Utility screen appears.
fig.02-10.eps
> (Utility).
3.
Touch <Customize>.
The Rhythm Customize screen appears.
When opening a new Rhythm Customize screen
1 2
3
6
7
4 5
8
9 10 11 12 13
4
9 10 11 12 13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Rhythm Name
Beat
button
Switches the page when the Rhythm pattern is displayed over multiple pages.
(Zoom Out/Zoom In) button
Expands (zooms in) and reduces (zooms out) the
Rhythm pattern display.
Current location (Measure: Beat: Tick)
Instrument Name
Indicates the name of the instrument used in the
Rhythm.
Rhythm Pattern Display
Displays the notes in the selected Rhythm pattern.
(Utility) button
Displays the menu with settings for the Rhythm
Customize function.
(Preview) button
Allows you to listen to the created Rhythm.
(Delete) button
Deletes the Rhythm in the displayed measure.
(Copy) button
Copies the Rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it to the end of that measure.
button
When more than eight different instruments are used in a Rhythm, press these buttons to switch through the instrument names.
Scroll Bar
This indicates the position of the current measure in the overall Rhythm.
188
AT-500_e.book 189 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Selecting the Division
What is the Division?
A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro, melody A, melody B, bridge and ending.
With the ATELIER, such changes in songs are allocated to the following six performance states. We call these six parts of a song “Divisions.”
Division
Intro
Original
Fill In To
Variation
Variation
Fill In To
Original
Ending
Performance division
The intro is played at the start of a song.
This is a basic accompaniment pattern.
This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes.
It is used to make a song more lively.
After the phrase is played, the variation’s accompaniment pattern is played.
This is a developmental accompaniment pattern. It is a variation on an Original.
This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes.
It is used to make a song more sedate.
After the phrase is played, the original’s accompaniment pattern is played.
This is played at the end of a song.
You can make a song more lively or more restrained by increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can also modify a song by changing the voice of the parts in the
Divisions.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p.
fig.RC-01.eps
2.
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.RC-02.eps
3.
Touch <Div Select> (Division Select).
fig.RC-03.eps
You can open the Division Select screen by touching the
Division name indication (p. 188) in the Rhythm Customize
screen.
4.
Touch a Division name to select the Division.
fig.RC-04.eps
This returns you to the Rhythm Customize screen. The name of the selected division now appears in the Rhythm
Customize screen.
You can touch < sounds.
> to hear how the Rhythm
189
AT-500_e.book 190 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
Loading the Rhythm
Use the Rhythm Customize function to select the Rhythm you want to use as the base for the Rhythm you are creating.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p.
fig.RC-01.eps
4.
Touch Group/Media < > < > to select
Rhythm group.
fig.RC-06.eps
5.
Touch < > < > to switch the screen, then touch a Rhythm name to select the Rhythm.
fig.RC-05-2.eps
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.RC-02.eps
3.
Touch <Load>.
The Rhythm Load screen appears.
fig.RC-05-1.eps
You can touch <Preview> to hear how the Rhythm sounds.
6.
Touch Division < > < > to select the
Division you want to call up.
Selecting “ALL” calls up all of the Divisions.
7.
Use the Variation buttons of the panel to change the arrangement of the accompaniment.
8.
Touch <Load>.
The Rhythm is called up, and the Rhythm Customize screen returns to the display.
190
AT-500_e.book 191 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Making the Division Settings
Independent “Drum Set,” “Beat,” and “Volume” settings can be made for each Division.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p.
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
Changing the Drum Set
4.
fig.RC-12-1.eps
Touch the value set for Drum Set.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
The Division Options screen reappears.
Changing the Beat
7.
fig.RC-12-2.eps
Touch the Beat setting.
3.
Touch <Div Options> (Division Options).
The Division Options screen appears.
8.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
9.
Touch <Exit>.
The Division Options screen reappears.
Changing the Volume
10.
Touch the Volume setting.
fig.RC-12-3.eps
11.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
12.
Touch <Exit>.
The Division Options screen reappears.
191
AT-500_e.book 192 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
Creating the User Rhythm
Editing the Rhythm
Edit the internal Rhythm.
What you can do
Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure
Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected Measure
Erasing Sounds
Adding Sounds
Altering Voices
Changing the Velocity
Moving Sounds
Page
Copying the Rhythm in a Selected
Measure
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).
2.
Touch <Copy> (to copy the selected measure).
fig.RC-10.eps
Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected
Measure
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p.
2.
Touch <Del> (to copy the selected measure).
fig.RC-10.eps
The following screen appears.
fig.RC-14.eps
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
3.
Touch <OK>.
The selected measure is deleted.
The following screen appears.
fig.RC-13.eps
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
3.
Touch <OK>.
Copies the Rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it to the end of that measure.
192
AT-500_e.book 193 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
Editing the Sounds
You can add and erase sounds, alter voices, and change the velocity.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).
fig.RC-10.eps
Erasing Sounds
3.
Touch < > < > to select the point where you want to erase the sound.
fig.RC-16.eps
2.
Touch the point on the screen where the sound you want to edit is located.
When you touch the screen, a line appears at the point you touch. By holding your finger to the screen and moving it to the left or right, you can have the line move along with your finger.
fig.RC-15-2.eps
4.
When you touch <Erase>, the selected sound is erased.
Adding Sounds
5.
Touch < > < > to select the point where you want to add the sound.
fig.RC-16.eps
The information on the location (Measure: Beat: Tick) of the line on the screen is displayed.
When you remove your finger from the screen, the Note
Edit screen opens, and the note positioned at the line in the Rhythm Customize screen is displayed.
fig.RC-16.eps
6.
When you touch <Create>, the new sound is added after the selected sound.
You can touch < > to open the Utility screen, and then touch <Note Edit> in the Utility screen to open the Note
Edit screen.
193
AT-500_e.book 194 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
Altering Voices
7.
Touch < > < > to select the sound whose voice you want to change.
8.
Touch the Instrument name.
fig.RC-17.eps
Moving Sounds
13.
Touch < > < you want to move.
> to select the sound
14.
Touch the “Meas Beat Tick” setting.
The note-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.
fig.RC-16.eps
9.
Touch <-8> <-1> <+1> <+8> to switch the voice.
Changing the Velocity
10.
Touch < > < > to select the sound whose velocity you want to change.
11.
Touch the Velocity setting.
fig.RC-18.eps
15.
Touch <-30> <-1> <+1> <+30> to move the sound.
With the Rhythm Customize function, note locations are expressed in terms of “Measure: Beat: Tick.” One tick is the smallest unit used in indicating the location of the note, and there are 120 ticks in a quarter note. Typical notes might be indicated as shown below.
Quarter Note
fig.RC_tick-01.eps
8th Note
1: 1: 0 1: 2: 0
(1 measure: 1 beat: 0 tick)
8th Note Triplet
fig.RC_tick-03.eps, fig.RC_tick-02.eps
3
1: 3: 0 1: 4: 0 1: 1: 0 1: 1: 60 1: 2: 0 1: 2: 60
16th Note
12.
Touch <-10> <-1> <+1> <+10> to change the velocity.
1: 1: 0 1: 1: 40 1: 1: 80 1: 1: 0 1: 1: 30 1: 1: 60 1: 1: 90
The ticks for each note have the following characteristics.
NOTE
Quarter Note
8th Note
8th Note Triplet
16the Note
TICKS
0 (Every 120 ticks)
0, 60 (Every 60 ticks)
0, 40, 80 (Every 40 ticks)
0, 30, 60, 90 (Every 30 ticks)
194
AT-500_e.book 195 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used
You can change an instrument used in a Rhythm and replace it with another instrument.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 188).
2.
Touch the section in the Rhythm Customize screen where the instrument names are displayed.
fig.RC-10.eps
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
4.
Touch <Change>.
The following screen appears.
5.
Touch < > < > to switch the screen, then touch the instrument name.
The following screen appears.
The Instrument Edit screen appears.
fig.RC-20.eps
You can open Instrument Edit screen using the following procedure.
1.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.RC-11.eps
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
6.
If you want to change the instrument, touch
<OK>.
The instrument is changed.
Deleting an Instrument
You can delete an instrument used in a Rhythm. When an instrument is deleted, all of the sounds using that instrument are deleted from the Rhythm.
7.
Touch < > < > in the screen to select the name of the instrument you want to delete.
8.
Touch <Delete> on the Instrument Edit screen.
fig.DelInstrumentOK?.eps
2.
Touch <Inst Edit> (Instrument Edit).
The Instrument Edit screen appears.
Changing the Instrument Used
3.
Touch < > < > in the screen to select the name of the instrument you want to change.
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
9.
If you are sure that you wish to delete the instrument, touch <OK>.
The selected instrument is deleted.
195
AT-500_e.book 196 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
Deleting Rhythms You Have Created
This deletes User Rhythms created by partially editing the internal Rhythms.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.RC-11.eps
3.
Touch <Save>.
The Rhythm Save screen appears.
fig.RC-19.eps
4.
Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
fig.RC-24.eps
3.
Touch <Clear>.
The following screen appears.
fig.RC-23.eps
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
4.
If you are sure that you wish to delete the
Rhythm, touch <OK>.
Saving the User Rhythm
Changing the Name of a User Rhythm
(Rename)
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
5.
Touch the character select button ( to switch among uppercase/lowercase/ symbols.
Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase
→ lowercase
→ symbols
→ uppercase...
)
6.
Touch the screen to specify the desired character.
The following characters can be selected.
Uppercase
Lowercase
Symbols
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
! “ # % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
Deletes a character.
Inserts a space (blank).
Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<OK>.
196
AT-500_e.book 197 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
Saving User Rhythms to the User
Memory or USB Memory
You can take User Rhythms created with the Rhythm Customize function and save them in the ATELIER’s User memory and USB memory.
To call up Rhythms saved in User memory, press the [User] button.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.RC-11.eps
Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as “- - - - -.” fig.RC-19-2.eps
3.
Touch <Save>.
The Rhythm Save screen appears.
fig.RC-19.eps
To cancel the save, touch <Exit> to close the Rhythm
Save screen.
You can change the name of a Rhythm by touching
<Rename>.
6.
Touch <Save>.
The User Rhythms are saved to the User memory or to
USB memory.
You can save Rhythms after changing the tempo by touching the Tempo [ ] [ ] button.
If the following screen appears
The following screen appears if you select a number to which a Rhythm has already been saved and then touch <Save>.
fig.OverwriteRhythmOK?.eps
4.
Touch < > < > to determine the save destination.
Select “Ext Memory” to save the data in USB memory, or
“Favorites” to save it in user memory.
Select “Disk” to save the data in floppy disk.
5.
Touch < > < > to select the number of the save destination.
If you wish to overwrite the Rhythm
1.
Touch <OK>.
The Rhythm will be rewritten.
If you wish to save new data instead of updating the Rhythm
1.
Touch <Cancel>.
Rewriting of the Rhythm will be canceled.
2.
In the Rhythm Save screen, select the number that is displayed as “-----” (a number that currently does not contain Rhythm data).
3.
Touch <Save>.
197
AT-500_e.book 198 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Adjusting How the Instrument
Responds
Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity
This adjusts the amount of the Initial Touch effect applied.
Initial Touch is a function that translates the force used in playing the keys into a directly proportional amount of volume.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch either <Upper>, or <Lower>.
Setting
Upper
Lower
Description
To change the initial touch setting of the
Upper part
To change the initial touch setting of the
Lower part
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Initial Touch.
fig.09-03.eps
Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony
You can set the Bass Pedalboard to play simultaneous multiple notes or single notes only.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Pedal>.
The Pedalboard screen appears.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the PedalBass
Mode.
fig.09-04.eps
4.
Touch the PedalBass Mode setting to switch between “MONOPHONIC” and
“POLYPHONIC.”
Each time you touch the PedalBass Mode setting, it will alternate between “MONOPHONIC” and
“POLYPHONIC.”
Setting
MONOPHONIC
POLYPHONIC
5.
Touch <Exit>.
Description
Only single notes can be played.
Multiple notes can be played.
4.
Touch the Initial Touch value (OFF, 1–10).
5.
Touch < > < > to edit the value.
Setting
1–10
OFF
Description
Initial Touch is on.
Striking the keys more forcefully will produce correspondingly louder sounds.
The change in volume when the keys are played forcefully increases as the value is increased.
Initial Touch is off.
Volume remains constant regardless of how hard you play.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
198
AT-500_e.book 199 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Performance Function Settings
Selecting the Keyboard Affected by the
Damper Pedal
You can specify which keyboard will be affected when you press the Damper (Sustain) pedal.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Damper
Pedal.
fig.09-08.eps
Changing the Function of the
Expression Pedal
Specify how the Expression Pedal will function when your performance is being recorded and when ATELIER song files are being played back.
Function During Recording
Specify whether Expression Pedal operations will be recorded or not while your performance is being recorded.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Exp. Src
(Rec).
fig.09-10.eps
4.
Touch the Damper Pedal setting to switch between “to UPPER” and “to LOWER.”
Each time you touch the Damper Pedal setting, it will alternate between “to UPPER” and “to LOWER.”
Setting to UPPER to LOWER
Description
The effect is applied to the voices played on the
Upper keyboard.
The effect is applied to the voices played on the
Lower keyboard.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
4.
Touch the Exp. Src (Rec) setting to switch between “PEDAL” and “COMPOSER.”
Each time you touch the Exp. Src (Rec) setting, it will alternate between “PEDAL” and “COMPOSER.”
Setting
PEDAL
COMPOSER
Description
Expression Pedal movements will be recorded. The previous recording will be erased as new songs are recorded.
Expression Pedal movements will not be recorded. The previous data will remain without being erased.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
199
AT-500_e.book 200 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Function During Playback
You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will function while ATELIER song files are being played back.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Exp. Src
(Play).
fig.09-10.eps
Choosing the Keyboard for which Pitch
Bend and Vibrato will Apply
This setting determines which keyboard will be controlled by the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Bender/
Vibrato.
fig.09-10.eps
4.
Touch the Exp. Src (Play) setting.
fig.09-12.eps
4.
Touch the Bender/Vibrato setting.
fig.09-13.eps
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
PEDAL
+COMPOSER
COMPOSER
PEDAL
Description
The Expression Pedal will function.
Expression Pedal recording within the song file will also be effective.
The Expression Pedal will not function. The
Expression Pedal recording within the song file will be effective.
The Expression Pedal will function. The
Expression Pedal recording within the song file will be ignored.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
200
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting to UPPER to LOWER to PEDAL
Description
The effect is applied to the voices played on the
Upper keyboard.
The effect is applied to the voices played on the
Lower keyboard.
The effect is applied to the voices played on the
Pedalboard.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
AT-500_e.book 201 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Changing the Pitch Bend Range
This setting allows you to choose the maximum amount of Pitch change (range) permissible when using Pitch Bend. The range can be set anywhere between 1–12 (in semitone units; with a maximum of one octave).
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the Pitch Bend
Range.
fig.09-14.eps
Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam
Controller
You can adjust the sensitivity of the D Beam controller.
Increasing this setting will make the D Beam controller more responsive.
The sensitivity of the D Beam controller can vary depending on the brightness of the surroundings. If it does not operate as you expect, please readjust the sensitivity.
1.
Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < > < > to display the D Beam
Sensitivity.
fig.09-14.eps
4.
Touch the Pitch Bend Range setting.
fig.09-15.eps
4.
Touch the D Beam Sensitivity setting.
fig.09-15.eps
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
1–12 (semitone steps)
6.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
Drums/SFX is fixed at one octave range, regardless of this setting.
5.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
1–10
6.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
201
AT-500_e.book 202 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Rhythm Settings
Turning Chord Hold On/Off
The Chord Hold function can be switched ON/OFF.
When Chord Hold is ON, the Automatic Accompaniment will continue playing even when you lift your hand from the key to play a new chord.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rhythm Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Chord Hold.
fig.02-11.eps
Changing the Intro Countdown Sound
(Count Down Sound)
You can change the sound that is used for the count played at
the end of the intro with the Intro Countdown function (p. 78).
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rhythm Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Count Down
Sound.
fig.02-11.eps
5.
Touch the Chord Hold setting to switch between “ON” and “OFF.”
Each time you touch the Chord Hold setting, it will alternate between “ON” and “OFF.”
Setting
ON
OFF
Description
The Automatic Accompaniment determined by the chord played on the Lower keyboard is held (even if you release the keys).
When you release the keys that you played in the Lower keyboard, the Automatic
Accompaniment will stop (be muted). Only the
Rhythm (drum) performance will continue.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
5.
Touch the Count Down Sound setting to switch between “VOICE” and “STICK.”
Each time you touch the Count Down Sound setting, it will alternate between “VOICE” and “STICK.”
Setting
VOICE
STICK
Description
Human voice count (One, two, three...)
Stick sound count
6.
Touch <Exit>.
202
AT-500_e.book 203 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Preventing Rhythm Tempos from
Switching Automatically
You can prevent Rhythm tempos from switching automatically when you switch Rhythms.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rhythm Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Auto Std
Tempo (Auto Standard Tempo).
fig.02-11-2.eps
Changing the Operation of the Fill In
Buttons
You can change the operation of the Fill In [Auto] button and
Fill In [Break] button so that they work in the same way as on the S-series.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rhythm Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Rhythm
Mode.
fig.02-11-2.eps
5.
Touch the Auto Std Tempo setting to switch between “ON” and “OFF.”
Each time you touch the Auto Std Tempo setting, it will alternate between “ON” and “OFF.”
Setting
ON
OFF
Description
Switching the Rhythm while the Rhythm is stopped automatically changes the tempo settings to those in the new Rhythm.
The tempo settings are not changed automatically when the Rhythms are changed.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
5.
Touch the Rhythm Mode setting to switch between “ORIGINAL” and “S-SERIES.”
Each time you touch the Rhythm Mode setting, it will alternate between “ORIGINAL” and “S-SERIES.”
Setting
ORIGINAL
S-SERIES
Description
The function of the Fill In [Auto] button and Fill
In [Break] button will not change.
The function of the Fill In [Auto] button and Fill
In [Break] button will change.
Fill In [Auto] button
→
Fill In [To Variation] button
Fill In [Break] button
→
Fill In [To Original] button
6.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
203
AT-500_e.book 204 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Placing the Panel Overlay Sheet
If you’ve set Rhythm Mode to “S-SERIES,” you can place the panel overlay sheet included with the ATELIER on the panel so that the button functions will be easy to see.
1.
Place the panel overlay sheet on Fill In buttons as shown in the illustration below.
On the panel overlay sheet are printed the names of the buttons for when Rhythm Mode is set to “S-SERIES.”
Button
Fill In
[To Variation] button
Fill In [To Original] button
Description
A fill-in (p. 79) will be played, and
then an elaborate Rhythm pattern will play.
A fill-in (p. 79) will be played, and
then a basic Rhythm pattern will play.
Starting the Rhythm (if Rhythm Mode is “S-SERIES”)
Starting with an Added Intro
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.
While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.
Starting with a short intro
1.
Press the Fill In [To Variation] or Fill In [To
Original] button.
[Start/Stop] button indicator will blink.
The indicator for the Fill In [To Variation] or [To Original] button will blink.
2.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.
Starting Without an Intro
1.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.
Stopping the Rhythm (if Rhythm Mode is “S-SERIES”)
Stopping with an Ending
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
An Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.
While the Ending is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off.
Stopping the Rhythm with a short ending
1.
Press the [To Variation] or [To Original] button, and then press the [Start/Stop] button.
A short Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.
Stopping without an Ending
1.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played.
204
AT-500_e.book 205 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Registration Settings
Changing the Timing at Which
Arranger Settings are Recalled
You can specify how the settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled when you press a Registration button.
1.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The Registration Load screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Registration Options screen appears.
fig.03-07.eps
Changing the Timing at Which
Transposition Settings are Recalled
You can specify how the transpose setting will be recalled when you press a Registration button.
1.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The Registration Load screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Registration Options screen appears.
fig.03-07.eps
4.
Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch between “DELAYED” and “INSTANT.”
Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will alternate between “DELAYED” and “INSTANT.”
Setting
DELAYED
INSTANT
Description
Settings related to Rhythm performances and
Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled when you hold a Registration button for several seconds. If you quickly press the Registration button, only the panel settings (voice, etc.) that are not related to Rhythm and Automatic
Accompaniment will be updated.
Settings related to Rhythm performances and
Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled the instant you press a button along with all other panel settings.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
4.
Touch the Trans. Update (Transpose Update) setting to switch between “DELAYED” and
“INSTANT.”
Each time you touch the Trans. Update setting, it will alternate between “DELAYED” and “INSTANT.”
Setting
DELAYED
INSTANT
Description
Transpose settings will be recalled when you hold a Registration button for several seconds.
Transpose setting will be recalled the instant you press a button along with all other panel settings.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
205
AT-500_e.book 206 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Composer Settings
Switching the Display of Lyrics On or Off
Some music files have Lyrics included and these Lyrics can be displayed on the screen. You can turn on or off the lyrics display of such music files.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Lyrics.
fig.09-16.eps
Changing the Key When Playing Back
Songs (Playback Transpose)
SMF music files or a performance that you yourself recorded can be transposed for playback.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Playback
Transpose.
fig.09-16.eps
5.
Touch the Lyrics setting to switch between
“ON” and “OFF.”
Touch the setting to toggle the display of lyrics “ON”
(visible) or “OFF” (hidden).
6.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
If you press a voice select button while playing back music files that contains lyrics, the display screen will switch, and the lyrics will no longer be displayed. To re-display the lyrics, touch <Play> on Rec/Play screen once again.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
5.
Touch the Playback Transpose setting.
fig.09-17.eps
6.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
The key is transposed by one semitone each time
< > or < > key is touched.
Setting
-6–0–5 (semitone steps)
7.
Touch <Exit>.
206
AT-500_e.book 207 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Changing the Metronome Setting
You can change the way in which the metronome will sound.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Metronome.
fig.09-16.eps
Adjusting the Metronome Volume
You can adjust the volume of the metronome.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Metronome
Vol (Metronome Volume).
fig.09-19.eps
5.
Touch the Metronome setting.
fig.09-18.eps
5.
Touch Metronome Vol. setting.
fig.09-20.eps
6.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
OFF
REC
ON
Description
Not heard at all
Heard only while recording
Heard constantly
7.
Touch <Exit>.
6.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
1–10
Increasing the value will raise the volume of the metronome.
7.
Touch <Exit>.
207
AT-500_e.book 208 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Changing the Sound of the Metronome
You can choose one of 4 different sounds for the metronome.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Metronome
Sound.
fig.09-19.eps
Setting the Beat
This setting determines the beat to be used when recording performance songs.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the Beat.
fig.09-19.eps
5.
Touch the Metronome Sound setting.
fig.09-21.eps
5.
Touch the Beat setting.
The time signature setting screen appears.
fig.09-19-2.eps
6.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
CLICK&BELL
ELECTRONIC
VOICE ENG.
VOICE JPN.
Description
Conventional metronome sound
Electronic metronome sound
Human voice (English)
Human voice (Japanese)
7.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
208
6.
Touch the time signature that you wish to set.
7.
Touch <Exit>.
If you’re using Rhythm performance or Automatic
Accompaniment, the time signature will be specified automatically.
NOTE
You cannot change the beat of previously recorded songs.
AT-500_e.book 209 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Setting the Type of CD To Be Played
Back
The ATELIER may be unable to correctly recognize the type of
CD being used. In such instances, you can specify the type of
CD manually.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the CD/Audio
Type.
fig.09-16.eps
Various Other Settings
6.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
Auto
Type A
Type B
STEREO
Description
The CD type is detected automatically.
General CDs for Player Piano contain audio and MIDI data, and the data format may vary from one CD to the next. If the CD’s data format does not match the ATELIER’s settings, a “beep” will sound.
Commercial Audio CD (CDs other than those designed for use with the piano player piano)
NOTE
Note that certain commercially available CDs cannot be played back on the
ATELIER
.
7.
Touch <Exit>.
5.
Touch the CD/Audio Type setting.
fig.09-18.eps
209
AT-500_e.book 210 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Adjusting the Timing of a Player Piano
CD’s Piano Sound and Accompaniment
With some player piano CDs, the piano and accompaniment sounds may not be synchronized properly. In such instances, you can adjust the timing of the piano sounds so that they are in time with the accompaniment.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to display the CD/Audio
Sync.
fig.09-16.eps
Other Settings
Adjust the Standard Pitch (Master Tune)
The basic pitch of an instrument is generally considered as the pitch of the middle A note. The “Master Tune” parameter lets you adjust this basic pitch to match the pitch of any other instruments that are playing together with the ATELIER.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < > < > to display the Master Tune.
fig.09-24.eps
3.
Touch the Master Tune setting.
fig.09-25.eps
5.
Touch the CD/Audio Sync setting.
fig.09-18.eps
6.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
0–100
7.
Touch <Exit>.
210
4.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
415.3Hz–466.2Hz (0.1 Hz units)
5.
Touch <Exit>.
By touching <
(440.0 Hz).
>, you can restore the default setting
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
AT-500_e.book 211 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Adjusting the Mic Echo
You can adjust the mic echo that will apply to a connected microphone.
Connecting the Microphone (p. 23)
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < > < > to display the Mic Echo.
fig.09-24.eps
Various Other Settings
Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers
Transmission of PC (Program Change) numbers can be switched ON/OFF when a Registration is selected.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < > < > to display the Send PC
Switch.
fig.00-37.eps
3.
Touch the Mic Echo setting.
fig.09-26.eps
4.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
0–12
5.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
3.
Touch the Send PC Switch setting to switch between “ON” and “OFF.”
Each time you touch the Send PC Switch setting, it will alternate between “ON” and “OFF.”
Setting
ON
OFF
Description
PC numbers are transmitted
PC numbers are not transmitted
4.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
211
AT-500_e.book 212 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Setting the PC Number
You can specify the Program Change number that will be transmitted from MIDI Out connector when a Registration is selected.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < > < > to display the Bank MSB
(Bank Select MSB), Bank LSB (Bank Select LSB), or PC Number (Program Change Number).
fig.00-37.eps
MIDI IN Mode
This instrument contains two sound generators: one for GM2/
GS data playback and one for keyboard performance.
Normally, data received at the MIDI In connector will control only the sound generator for GM2/GS data playback.
However by changing the MIDI IN Mode setting, you can also control the keyboard sound generator from MIDI In.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < > < > to display the MIDI IN Mode.
fig.09-24.eps
3.
Touch either <Bank MSB>, <Bank LSB>, or <PC
Number> setting.
fig.09-28.eps
4.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Bank MSB
Menu
Bank LSB
PC Number
5.
Touch <Exit>.
0–127
0–127
1–128
Setting
3.
Touch the MIDI IN Mode setting to switch between “MODE 1” and “MODE 2.”
Each time you touch the MIDI IN Mode setting, it will alternate between “Mode 1” and “Mode 2.”
Setting
MODE 1
MODE 2
Description
Control the instrument as a GS sound generator
Channels 5 through 10 and Channels 12, 14, 15 are transmitted to the GS sound generator, and all other channels are transmitted to the keyboard sound generator.
Channel
1
2
3
4
5–10
11
12
13
14–15
16
GS
GS
GS
GS
GS
MODE 1
GS
GS
GS
GS
GS
MODE 2
Solo
Pedal/GS *
Lower
Upper
GS
Drums/SFX
GS
Manual Percussion
GS
Control
212
AT-500_e.book 213 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
* When the pedal part button is ON, data received at the MIDI In connector will control the pedal part of keyboard sound generator. When the pedal part button is OFF, data received at the MIDI In connector will control the GS sound generator.
4.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
Selecting the MIDI Transmit Channel
When you use the MIDI connectors or the USB connector of the ATELIER to transmit musical data to external devices, for each keyboard (Upper, Lower, and Pedal) you can specify the channel on which your playing will be transmitted as MIDI messages.
For details refer to “Connecting MIDI Devices” (p. 231).
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
fig.09-24.eps
Various Other Settings
2.
Touch the part to change the MIDI Transmit
Channel.
Menu
Tx MIDI Ch. Upper
Tx MIDI Ch. Lower
Tx MIDI Ch. Pedal
Tx MIDI Ch. Solo
Tx MIDI Ch. Drums
Tx MIDI Ch. M.Perc
Tx MIDI Ch. Ctrl
Upper
Lower
Pedal
Part
Solo
Drums/SFX
Manual Percussion
Control
The Control part transmits Expression pedal data and PC numbers.
3.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
fig.09-31-a.eps
fig.09-30.eps
Setting
1–16
4.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
MIDI messages for the Solo part will be transmitted only when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON.
fig.10-11.eps
213
AT-500_e.book 214 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the
Main Screen
You can set the main screen so that the bouncing ball does not appear.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < > < > to display the Main
Bouncing Ball.
fig.09-44.eps
Switching the Background of the Main
Screen
You can change the color and pattern for the main screen’s background.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < > < > to display the Main
Background.
fig.09-44.eps
3.
Touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting to switch between “ON” and “OFF.”
Each time you touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting, it will alternate between “ON” and “OFF.”
Setting
ON
OFF
Description
The bouncing ball appears in the main screen.
The bouncing ball does not appear in the main screen.
4.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
3.
Touch the Main Background setting.
4.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
fig.10-13.eps
5.
Touch <Exit>.
The System screen appears.
6.
Touch <Exit> on the System Screen.
The main screen appears with the selected background.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
214
AT-500_e.book 215 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Using the V-LINK Function
Connecting the ATELIER to a V-LINK compatible image device allows you to control the images with the ATELIER.
V-LINK
V-LINK ( ) is a function that allows music and images to be performed together. By using MIDI to connect two or more V-LINK compatible devices, you can easily enjoy a wide range of visual effects that are linked to the expressive elements of a music performance.
How to Use the V-LINK
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < > < > to display the V-LINK.
fig.10-14.eps
3.
Touch the V-LINK setting (OFF/MODE 1/
MODE2).
4.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
OFF
MODE 1
MODE 2
Description
The V-LINK function is switched off.
The V-LINK function is switched on.
You can now control the video images using the Registration buttons.
The V-LINK function is switched on.
You can now control the video images using the twelve rightmost keys of the lower keyboard and Registration buttons.
No sound is produced when you press any of the twelve keys at the right end of the keyboard.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
The V-LINK function is turned on, and the V-LINK icon appears in the main screen.
fig.09-41.eps
The Send PC Switch settings is automatically switched to
ON when V-LINK is on (MODE 1, MODE 2). When the V-
LINK function is switched off, the Send PC Switch setting reverts to the setting in effect before V-LINK was switched on.
When V-LINK is set to “MODE 1”
When a Registration button is pressed, “Bank Select” and “Program Change Number” messages are transmitted from the MIDI Out connector as video control messages. At this time, the Control MIDI transmit channel setting is disregarded, and the messages are transmitted via Channel 16.
When V-LINK is set to “MODE 2”
In addition to the functions of “MODE 1,” MODE 2 also sets the device to transmit “Note messages” as video control messages from the MIDI Out connector when one of the twelve rightmost keys in the Lower keyboard is pressed.
In this case, the Lower and Solo MIDI transmit channel settings are disregarded, and the messages are transmitted via Channel 16.
NOTE
The MIDI transmit channel used for video control messages is fixed at channel 16.
NOTE
For more on switching video images, refer to the owner’s manual for the connected device.
215
AT-500_e.book 216 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
You can also use the following procedure to turn the
V-LINK function on.
1.
Hold down the Composer [Reset] button and press either the Upper Organ [Full] button or the Upper Organ [Jazz] button.
Holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full] button switches
the instrument to “MODE 1” (p. 215). Holding
down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Jazz] button switches the
instrument to “MODE 2” (p. 215).
The display changes as shown below, and the
ATELIER switches to Image Control mode.
fig.09-42.eps
Viewing the Contents of the ATELIER’s
Screen on a External Display
You can use your external display to view the contents of the
ATELIER’s built-in screen.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < > < > to display the Screen Out.
fig.10-12.eps
The V-LINK function is turned on, and the V-LINK icon appears in the main screen.
fig.09-41.eps
2.
To cancel the V-LINK function, once again hold down the Composer [Reset] button and press either the Upper Organ [Full] button or the Upper Organ [Jazz] button.
If set to “MODE 1” (p. 215), holding down the
Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper
Organ [Full] button switches the V-LINK function
off. If set to “MODE 2” (p. 215), holding down the
Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper
Organ [Jazz] button switches the V-LINK function off.
3.
Touch the Screen Out setting to switch between
“ON” and “OFF.”
Setting
ON
OFF
Description
The contents of the ATELIER’s screen will be shown on your external display.
The contents of the ATELIER’s screen will not be shown on your external display. The ATELIER logo will be shown.
NOTE
I If the Slide Show setting is on, the slide show will be shown on your external display.
4.
Touch <Exit>.
216
AT-500_e.book 217 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Repositioning the Touch Screen
If you’ve been using the Touch Screen for some time, the pointer may be shifted, making the ATELIER react incorrectly.
You should correct this displacement when necessary by performing calibration (repositioning).
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
In the System screen, touch <Utility>.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.00-38.eps
Various Other Settings
NOTE
fig.09-38-2.eps
Do this carefully, because touching a location that’s different from the one indicated for the pointer may make the displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer accurately. If the following display appears, perform the touch panel position adjustment once again.
3.
Touch <Touch Screen>.
fig.00-38-2.eps
A display will ask for confirmation.
To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>.
4.
Touch <OK> on the screen.
5.
Touch the points indicated on the touch screen.
217
AT-500_e.book 218 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings
You can restore the User memory to their original factory settings.
This function is called “User Memory Reset.”
What is User Memory?
“User Memory” refers to an area inside the instrument where you can store the User Rhythms you create and the performances you record. Rhythms and SMF music files saved on USB memory can also be copied to user
User memory is quite useful, since anything you place there will be retained even while the power is turned off.
The following things are stored in User memory:
• Songs you’ve registered in “Favorites”
• Rhythms
• Registration sets
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
fig.00-37.eps
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <User Reset>.
fig.00-43-1.eps
The confirmation message appears on screen.
fig.00-43-2.eps
Touch <Cancel> to return to the System screen without resetting the user memory.
4.
Touch <OK>.
The user memory will be reset to the factory-set state.
NOTE
Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!
fig.00-40-2.eps
2.
In the System screen, touch <Utility> to open the Utility screen.
fig.00-38.eps
To reset all settings other than User memory to their original
factory settings, refer to p. 219. If you want to reset all
settings to their factory-set state, refer to p. 24.
218
AT-500_e.book 219 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
The confirmation message appears on screen.
fig.00-43-2.eps
Restoring All Settings Other
Than the User Memory to the
Original Factory Settings
You can restore all of the settings other than the User memory
(p. 218) to their original factory settings.
This function is called “Panel Reset.”
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
fig.00-37.eps
If you touch <Cancel>, the Panel Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the System screen.
4.
Touch <OK>.
The Panel Reset operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.
NOTE
Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!
fig.00-40-2.eps
2.
In the System screen, touch <Utility> to open the Utility screen.
fig.00-38.eps
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Panel Reset>.
fig.00-43-1.eps
NOTE
To reset only the User memory to its original factory settings,
refer to p. 218. If you want to reset all settings to their
factory-set state, refer to p. 24.
NOTE
You can also use the following method to open the Panel
Reset confirmation screen.
1.
Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen, to display the Quick Guide screen.
2.
Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button.
The Panel Reset confirmation screen appears.
219
AT-500_e.book 220 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Formatting a USB Memory
(Format)
The process of preparing USB memory or floppy disks so that they can be used with the ATELIER is called “initialization”
(formatting).
In certain cases, particularly with floppy disks, the media is formatted for a specific type of device. If the media format does not match the ATELIER’s, you will not be able to use that media with the ATELIER.
1.
Connect the USB memory to the External
Memory connector
If you want to initialize a floppy disk, connect your floppy disk drive (sold separately) to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.
2.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
3.
Touch <go to Save>.
The Registration Save screen appears.
4.
Touch < > < > to select the media.
Choose
“
Ext Memory
”
if you want to initialize USB memory, or choose
“
Disk
”
if you want to initialize a floppy disk.
5.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
6.
Touch <Format>.
The Format screen appears.
Displaying a Graphic at Power-up
The ATELIER allows you to load a favorite graphic into internal memory, and have it be displayed when the power is turned on.
1.
Use your computer to create a graphic image file that meets the following criteria:
Size
Color
Format
800 x 480 pixels
24 bit colors
Image saved in BMP format
1–8 characters in length (lowercase is ok). A filename extension of “.BMP” must be added after the name.
Name
The following characters can be used to name an image.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W
X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 # $ % & ‘ ( ) - @ ~ { } ^ _ !
NOTE
If you use a character that cannot be used in a name, it will be replaced by another character when displayed.
2.
Using your computer, save the image that you want to load into the ATELIER on external media.
3.
Connect the external media containing the image to the ATELIER.
If you’re using USB memory, connect it to the External
Memory connector. If you’re using a floppy disk, connect the separately purchased floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.
4.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
5.
In the System screen, touch <Utility>.
fig.00-38.eps
If you touch <Cancel>, you will return to the Registration
Save screen without formatting.
7.
Touch <OK> to start formatting.
When the format is finished, the Registration Save screen returns.
NOTE
Never attempt to remove the USB memory until formatting is complete.
220
AT-500_e.book 221 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
6.
Touch <BMP Installer>.
The BMP Installer screen appears.
fig.09-34.eps
Display
01–03
View
Load...
Clear...
Description
Images stored in internal memory
For numbers at which no image is saved,
“(Blank)” is shown.
The image stored in the ATELIER will be shown for a few seconds, allowing you to check the image.
Load an image from external media into internal memory.
Delete an image from internal memory.
The ATELIER can store up to three images. If two or more images are stored in internal memory, those images will be displayed consecutively after the power is turned on.
7.
In the screen, touch <01>–<03> to select the destination at which the image is to be saved.
fig.09-35.eps
To erase the currently loaded image, and load the new image
1.
Touch <OK>.
To cancel image loading
1.
Touch <Cancel>.
NOTE
If the image cannot be loaded, the following screen will appear.
fig.09-38.eps
8.
Touch <Load...>.
The following screen appears.
fig.09-36.eps
Various Other Settings
9.
Touch < > < > to select the media.
Choose “Ext Memory” to load an image from USB memory, or choose “Disk” to load an image from floppy disk.
The destination will show the names of the images saved on the external media.
10.
Touch < > < > to select the image that you want to load into internal memory.
You can touch <View> to verify the image.
11.
Touch <OK>.
The image will be loaded.
NOTE
If an image is already stored at the load destination, the following screen will appear.
fig.09-37.eps
221
AT-500_e.book 222 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
Deleting an Image Stored in Internal
Memory
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
In the System screen, touch <Utility>.
fig.00-38.eps
5.
Touch <Clear...>.
The following screen appears.
fig.09-39.eps
To cancel without deleting the image, touch <Cancel>.
6.
Touch <OK>.
The image will be deleted.
Once the image has been deleted, the screen will indicate
“(Blank.)”
3.
Touch <BMP Installer>.
fig.09-32.eps
The BMP Installer screen appears.
fig.09-34.eps
4.
In the screen, touch <01>–<03> to select the image that you wish to delete.
You can touch <View> to verify the image.
Numbers for which “(Blank)” is shown have no image.
222
AT-500_e.book 223 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Copying Data from a Floppy
Disk to USB Memory
All songs and Registration data saved on a floppy disk can be copied to USB memory.
NOTE
Rhythms and image data cannot be copied.
NOTE
Songs and Registrations inside folders will not be copied. If you want to copy this data, move the song or Registration data out of the folder.
1.
Make preparations for the copy.
Connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Memory connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert the floppy disk containing the data you want to copy.
Connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector.
2.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
3.
In the System screen, touch <Utility>.
fig.00-38.eps
4.
Touch <DiskToExtMem>.
The following screen appears.
Various Other Settings
5.
Touch <OK>.
A screen like the one below appears, allowing you to specify a name for the folder.
If you’re copying all songs and Registrations to USB memory, a folder will be created in the USB memory, and the data will be saved in this folder.
6.
Touch the character select button ( to switch among uppercase/numbers.
Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase
→ numbers
→ uppercase...
)
7.
Touch the screen to specify the desired character.
The following characters can be selected.
Uppercase
Symbols
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
_ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Deletes a character.
Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.
To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>.
8.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<OK>.
The folder name has been assigned.
The following screen appears.
If you decide to stop the data copy operation, touch
<Cancel>.
223
AT-500_e.book 224 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
9.
Touch <OK>.
The data from floppy disk will be copied to USB memory.
When the copy is completed, a message will indicate
“Completed,” and you will return to the System screen.
NOTE
If the floppy disk drive or USB memory is not connected correctly, a screen like the following will appear.
fig.++-+++
Video-related Settings
Selecting the Type of Slide Show
You can specify how transitions between images are to occur
when you play back a slide show (p. 236).
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch <Utility>.
fig.00-38.eps
3.
Touch <VIMA TUNES>.
The VIMA TUNES screen appears.
4.
Touch <Options>.
The Video Option screen appears.
224
AT-500_e.book 225 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
5.
Touch the Slide Show Type setting.
Selecting the Interval at which Images will Change
You can specify the interval at which images will change
when you play back a slide show (p. 236).
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch <Utility>.
fig.00-38.eps
6.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
SIMPLE
BLOCK
POP
MIX
Description
One photo will simply fade-out while the next photo fades-in.
The photo will be divided into blocks that change separately.
The photo will switch using rapid movement and color combination.
Simple, block, and pop types will be combined.
7.
Touch <Exit>.
3.
Touch <VIMA TUNES>.
The VIMA TUNES screen appears.
4.
Touch <Options>.
The Video Option screen appears.
225
AT-500_e.book 226 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Various Other Settings
5.
Touch the Slide Show Interval setting.
6.
Touch < > < > to change the setting.
Setting
5 SECONDS, 8 SECONDS, 12 SECONDS,
4 MEASURES, 6 MEASURES, 8 MEASURES
7.
Touch <Exit>.
226
AT-500_e.book 227 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Connecting with External Device
Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
The functions of the jacks on the bottom of the keyboard are described below.
1.
Output Main L/Mono, R Jacks
These jacks can be connected to your audio system to enjoy more powerful sound.
6.
Mic Jack
→
Connect microphone here.
2.
3.
Input L/Mono, R Jacks
Using these jacks, you can connect other sound generating devices or audio equipment and play sounds from other devices through the ATELIER’s speaker.
RGB Out Connector
You can connect an external display here to view a slideshow.
7.
8.
MIDI Out/In Connectors
→
You can connect external MIDI devices to the ATELIER and exchange performance data between them.
USB Connector
→
Used for connecting a computer to the ATELIER using a USB cable
.
4.
Phones Jacks
→
Connect headphones here.
5.
Mic Volume Knob
→
This adjusts the volume when a microphone is connected.
227
AT-500_e.book 228 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Connecting with External Device
Connecting to Audio Equipment
You can connect audio devices to play the sound of the
ATELIER through the speakers of your audio system, or to record your performance on a tape recorder or other recording device.
When connecting, please use an audio cable with a standard phone plug, such as the PCS-100PW (sold separately).
Connecting Speakers to the ATELIER and Outputting Sounds
* When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume level of equipment connected to the input jacks may be low.
If this happens, use connection cables that do not contain resistors.
921
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.
Turning Off the Power
1.
Turn the volume all the way down on the
ATELIER and on the speaker you’re about to connect.
2.
Turn off the connected speaker.
3.
Turn off the ATELIER.
Input (Line In) jack
1.
2.
3.
Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the speaker you’re about to connect.
Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the speaker.
Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the connection.
Switch on the ATELIER.
4.
5.
6.
Switch on the connected speaker.
Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the connected speaker.
When you play the ATELIER’s keyboard, the sound is played from the connected speakers.
228
AT-500_e.book 229 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Connecting with External Device
Playing Sounds from Audio Equipment
Through the ATELIER
Connecting a Computer
The following become possible once you connect a USB cable
(available separately) between the USB connector located to the lower left of the ATELIER and the USB connector of your computer.
• You can use the ATELIER to play sounds from SMF music files played back with MIDI software.
• By exchanging MIDI data with sequencer software, you can save songs recorded with the ATELIER to your computer, and enjoy a variety of musical control and editing features.
Connect the ATELIER to your computer as shown below.
Stereo Set etc.
Output (Line Out) jack
1.
Turn the volume all the way down on the
ATELIER and on the audio device you’re about to connect.
2.
Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the audio device.
3.
Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the connection.
4.
5.
Switch on the audio device.
Switch on the ATELIER.
6.
Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the audio device.
The sounds from the connected audio device are played by the ATELIER.
Turning Off the Power
1.
Turn the volume all the way down on the
ATELIER and on the audio device you’re about to connect.
2.
3.
Turn off the ATELIER.
Turn off the audio device.
USB Cable
USB
Connector
* Refer to the Roland website for system requirements.
Roland website: http://www.roland.com/
Computer
229
AT-500_e.book 230 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Connecting with External Device
If connection to your computer is unsuccessful...
Normally, you don’t need to install a driver in order to connect the ATELIER to your computer. However, if some problem occurs, or if the performance is poor, using the Roland original driver may solve the problem.
Specify the USB driver you want to use, and then install the driver.
For details on downloading and installing the Roland original driver, refer to the Roland website.
Roland website: http://www.roland.com/
Specify the USB driver you want to use for ATELIER, and then install the driver.
Caution
• To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.
• Only MIDI data can be transmitted using USB.
• USB cables are not included. Consult your Roland dealer if you need to purchase.
• Turn on the power to the ATELIER before starting up
MIDI applications on the computer. Do not turn the
ATELIER on or off while any MIDI application is running.
Making the Settings for the USB Driver
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < > < > to display the USB Driver.
fig.10-12.eps
3.
Touch the USB Driver setting to switch between
“GENERIC” and “ORIGINAL.”
Each time you touch the USB Driver setting, it will alternate between “GENERIC” and “ORIGINAL.”
Setting
GENERIC
ORIGINAL
Description
Choose this if you want to use the standard USB driver that was included with your computer.
Normally, you should use this mode.
Choose this if you want to use a USB driver downloaded from the Roland website.
4.
Turn the ATELIER’s volume to the minimum level, switch off the power, then turn it back on again.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.
230
AT-500_e.book 231 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Connecting with External Device
Connecting MIDI Devices
By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging performance data, you can control the performances on one device from the other. For instance, you can output sound from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument.
What’s MIDI?
MIDI, short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface,” was developed as a standard for the exchange of performance data between electronic instruments and computers.
The ATELIER is equipped with MIDI connectors to let it exchange performance data with external devices. These connectors can be used to connect the ATELIER to an external device for even greater versatility.
About MIDI Connectors
The ATELIER has two kinds of MIDI connectors.
Connecting these to the MIDI connectors on a MIDI instrument makes it possible for the two instruments to control each other.
For instance, you can output sound from the other instrument or switch tones on the other instrument.
You should also set the MIDI send channel as needed.
fig.10-09.eps
The ATELIER contains two sound generators: one sound generator for its own keyboards and one GM2/GS sound
generator (p. 252). Normally, musical data transmitted from
an external device to the MIDI In connector is sent to the
GM2/GS sound generator, but you can also set the “MIDI IN
Mode” parameter (p. 212) so that the keyboard sound
generator is controlled.
Making the Connections
NOTE
When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other equipment.
1.
Turn the volume all the way down on the
ATELIER and on the device you’re about to connect.
2.
Switch off the power to the ATELIER and the device you’re about to connect.
3.
Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the MIDI connectors to each other.
4.
Switch on the power to the ATELIER and the connected device.
5.
Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the connected device.
6.
You should also set the MIDI send channel as
MIDI Out Connector
Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector with an optional MIDI cable. The notes played on the keyboard, movements of the Damper pedal, Expression data, data indicating that a Registration button, etc., was pressed will be transmitted to the external MIDI connector. The Solo voice will be transmitted only if the Solo [To Lower] button is
ON.
MIDI In Connector
Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI out connector with an optional MIDI cable. Performance messages from an external MIDI device are received here.
These incoming messages may instruct the receiving MIDI instrument to play sounds or switch voices.
231
AT-500_e.book 232 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Connecting with External Device
Connecting an External Display
Connecting an External Display
Instrument
NOTE
Display Cable
(commercial available)
Displays That Can Be Connected to This
In general, a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan monitors that are available on the market are compatible with this instrument. However, before you connect any monitor, make sure it meets the following specifications:
Resolution
Horizontal scan frequency
Vertical scan frequency
Connector
Signal
800 x 480 pixels
31.5 kHz
60 Hz
3-row, 15-pin D-Sub type
Analog
NOTE
Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the frequencies mentioned above. Using a display that is not compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect image output when images move, and in certain cases may even damage the display.
External Display
Making the Connections
921
NOTE
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the
display to be connected (p. 22).
Connect your display to the ATELIER.
Use display cable (sold separately) to connect the display to the RGB Out connector on the ATELIER.
Switch on the ATELIER (p. 22).
Switch on the connected display.
For more on handling the external display, refer to your display’s owner’s manual.
232
AT-500_e.book 233 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Enjoying Music and Video
You can connect an external display to the ATELIER, and use it to view images from a device connected to the ATELIER.
You can also connect a CD drive (commercially available) and play back
VIMA TUNES (sold separately). While playing a VIMA TUNES song, you can use the external display to view a slide show suitable for the character of the song, or play along using recommended tones.
¬
VIMA TUNES Screen
In the System Utility screen, touch <VIMA TUNES> to access the “VIMA
TUNES screen” shown below.
You can also access the “VIMA
TUNES screen” from the “Rec/
Mute the melody portion, or reduce the volume.
Change the key of the song that’s playing
Sounds appropriate for the currently playing VIMA TUNES song will be selected automatically.
VIMA TUNES
VIMA TUNES is a Roland specification for music files that contains image and lyric data, allowing you to enjoy songs with lyrics and images simultaneously. When data bearing the “VIMA TUNES” logo is played back on a device that bears the same logo, lyrics can be shown on the screen of a connected external display, letting you enjoy karaoke or watch a slide show.
233
AT-500_e.book 234 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Enjoying Music and Video
Enjoying VIMA TUNES Songs
Listening to a VIMA TUNES Song
You can connect a CD drive (commercially available) and play back VIMA
TUNES (sold separately). While playing a VIMA TUNES song, you can use the external display to view a slide show suitable for the character of the song, or play along using recommended tones.
1.
Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the VIMA TUNES disc into the CD drive.
2.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
3.
Touch <Utility>.
If you want to use a CD or the
CD drive, refer to “Using a CD”
4.
Touch <VIMA TUNES>.
The VIMA TUNES screen appears.
5.
Touch < > < > to select the song you want to play.
234
You can also press the panel’s
[Song] button and choose a
VIMA TUNES song from Song
Select screen.
NOTE
It will take a certain amount of time until VIMA TUNES song can be selected.
AT-500_e.book 235 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
6.
Touch < > to start playing back the song.
Enjoying Music and Video
You can touch Playback Transpose < > < > to change the key of the song.
When you touch Melody <Mute> in the screen, the melody will be muted.
You can mute the melody, and play the melody yourself.
When you touch Melody <Guide> in the screen, the volume of the melody will be lowered. You can leave the melody playing at a lowered volume and play along until you’ve learned the melody. Since you will still be able to hear the melody, you can use it as a guide during practice.
7.
Touch < > to stop playing back the song.
235
AT-500_e.book 236 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Enjoying Music and Video
Displaying a Slide Show while the Song Plays
While playing back a VIMA CD-ROM (VIMA TUNES), you can view a slide show of images that match the mood of the song.
Songs on a CD-ROM created for VIMA (VIMA TUNES) contain slide show images suitable for those songs, making it easy for you to enjoy a slide show without having to prepare your own images (photos).
1.
Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the VIMA TUNES disc into the CD drive.
2.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
3.
Touch <Utility>.
4.
Touch <VIMA TUNES>.
The VIMA TUNES screen appears.
You can also press the panel’s
[Song] button and choose a
VIMA TUNES song from Song
Select screen.
5.
Touch <Slide Show> so it’s lit.
236
AT-500_e.book 237 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Enjoying Music and Video
6.
7.
Touch < > < > to select the song you want to play.
Touch < > to start playing back the song.
A slide show suitable for the character of the song will be shown on the external display connected to the ATELIER.
8.
Touch < > to stop playing back the song.
NOTE
It will take a certain amount of time until VIMA TUNES song can be selected.
Viewing the ATELIER’s screen to check the image that’s shown on your external display
You can view the ATELIER’s screen to check the image that’s shown on your external display.
1.
Press the [Video Monitor] button, getting its indicator to light up.
The [Video Monitor] button indicator will alternate between on (lit) and off (dark) each time it is pressed. fig.01-32_AT-900.eps
The ATELIER’s display will show the same image as shown on your external display.
237
AT-500_e.book 238 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Enjoying Music and Video
Performing with Sounds that Match the Song
(Recommended Tones)
When playing along on keyboard while listening to a CD-ROM made for the
VIMA (VIMA TUNES), this function lets you play on Upeer keyboard using instrumental sounds that are appropriate for the atmosphere of the selected song. If you select a song from a CD-ROM created for VIMA (VIMA TUNES), three recommended tones will automatically be selected in the VIMA TUNES screen. You can use these three sounds to perform sounds that will match the character of that song.
When you want to select a song from a CD-ROM made for the VIMA (VIMA
TUNES), insert the CD-ROM into the CD drive.
1.
2.
Select the song of VIMA CD-ROM (p. 239).
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
3.
4.
Touch <Utility>.
Touch <VIMA TUNES>.
The VIMA TUNES screen appears.
The three recommended tones are shown in the lower part of the screen.
5.
6.
7.
Touch one of the recommended tones in the screen to select a tone.
Touch < > to start playing back the song.
Play along with the song.
The tones you play will be suitable for the character of the song.
8.
Touch < > to stop playing back the song.
238
AT-500_e.book 239 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Enjoying Music and Video
Listening to Songs from Music CD
You can connect a CD drive to the ATELIER and use it to play music CDs. This lets you perform or sing along with the backing of a music CD.
1.
Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the music CD into the CD drive.
2.
Press the [Song] button.
The Song Select screen appears.
If you want to use a CD or the
CD drive, refer to “Using a CD”
NOTE
You can’t copy music CD songs to “Favorites.”
NOTE
It will take a certain amount of time until a music CD can be selected.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Touch < > < > to select the “CD.”
Touch < > < > to select the song you want to play.
Touch <
Touch <
> (
> (
) to start playing back the song.
) to stop playing back the song.
NOTE
You can also play or stop the music data by touching <Play> or <Stop> in the Rec/Play screen, and you can touch
<Bwd> or <Fwd> to rewind or fast-forward the playback.
239
AT-500_e.book 240 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Enjoying Music and Video
Enjoying Karaoke with a Music CD (Center Cancel)
You can minimize the vocal sounds of a commercially available music CD, and sing the vocal part yourself. This is a convenient way to enjoy karaoke or practice soloing with a favorite music CD.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector.
Insert the music CD you want to use into the CD drive, and
select the song you want to sing (p. 239).
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
Touch <Utility>.
Touch <VIMA TUNES>.
The VIMA TUNES screen appears.
Touch the Melody <Mute> on the screen.
The Center Cancel function is active.
Touch < > to start playing back the song.
When you play back the song, the sound of the melody or vocal will be minimized.
This lets you perform the melody portion yourself.
Transposing the Song to a Comfortable Key for
Singing
You can transpose the song to a key that is more comfortable for you to sing.
If you or someone else will be singing along with a song, you can change the key of the song so it’s appropriate for the singer’s range.
1.
Touch Playback Transpose < > < > on the VIMA Tunes screen.
Each time you touch Playback Transpose < > < semitone.
>, the key is changed by one
Touch < > to lower the key, or touch < > to raise the key.
This can be set in a range of -6–0–+5 (semitone steps).
The VIMA TUNES screen shows the value you’ve specified.
2.
If you touch Playback Transpose < > < > to select “0,”
Key Control will be turned off.
NOTE
For some songs, the vocal sound may not be eliminated completely.
NOTE
If you select a different song, the playback transpose settings will return to their factory-set state.
240
AT-500_e.book 241 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Troubleshooting
If the ATELIER does not function in the way you except, first check the following chart. If this does not resolve the problem, consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station.
Power does not Turn On
Problem
When you press the [Power On] switch, the power doesn’t come on
Check Solution
Power cord is not connected correctly.
Connect the power cord correctly.
Page
Problems with the Screen Display
Lyrics are not indicated properly in the display
Problem
Nothing appears on screen
It appears as though there are vertical stripes in the screen
Can’t view the main screen
Bouncing Ball is not shown
Notation is not indicated properly in the display
Check
The ATELIER uses a liquid-crystal screen, so text may not be displayed when the ambient temperature is below freezing.
This is due to the nature of a liquid crystal display, and is not a malfunction.
Solution
This is not a malfunction.
This is not a malfunction.
The [Video Monitor] button is lit.
If the [Video Monitor] button is lit, the
ATELIER’s display will show the same image as the device connected to the
ATELIER. Press the [Video Monitor] button so it’s turned off.
The Bouncing Ball display is turned off.
Turn the Main Bouncing Ball setting ON.
With some music files, the lyrics cannot be displayed correctly.
This is not a malfunction.
In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.
A button was pressed while the lyrics were being shown in the display.
During the display of lyrics, you could be taken to a different screen if you press a button.
In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.
The Notation display feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation.
If you select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will not be displayed in the notation.
This is not a malfunction.
If you want to have the lyrics be displayed again, touch <Play> on the Rec/Play screen.
This is not a malfunction.
This is not a malfunction.
Change the part that is displayed.
Page
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
241
AT-500_e.book 242 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Troubleshooting
No Sound is Heard
Problem
No sound is heard
Lower keyboard cannot be heard
Upper keyboard cannot be heard
Check
The [Master Volume] slider is set too low.
Headphones are connected.
When you connect the headphones, the sound is heard only through the headphones.
The plug is still plugged into the headphone jack.
The volume is set too low on the Level
[
▲
] [
▼
] buttons.
The volume is set too low on the
Expression Pedal.
Turn the [Master Volume] knob toward
“Max.”
Solution
If you want sound to be output from the speakers, disconnect the headphones.
Disconnect the plug from the headphone jack.
Press the Level [
▲ volume.
][
▼
] buttons to raise the
You do not have a Voice selected.
Drums/SFX are selected for the Lower keyboard, but you are playing a key to which no drum sound is assigned.
The Lower keyboard will not produce sound while an Intro or Ending is being played.
“Percussion Set 3” has been selected for the Upper keyboard.
When “Percussion Set 3” is selected, some keys may have no sound assigned to them.
Advance the expression pedal.
Press a voice button to select a voice.
Voices that have their button indicator lit can be played.
Turn the Drums/SFX off or play keys to which drums sounds are assigned.
This is not a malfunction.
For the upper keyboard, select a voice other than “Percussion Set 3.”
No sound is heard (when external devices are connected)
The power of the connected external devices is not turned on.
Use the correct procedure to turn on the power of the connected external devices.
There is no sound from the twelve keys at the right of the lower keyboard
The V-LINK function is set Mode 2.
When V-LINK setting is Mode 2, the group of twelve keys starting at the very right of the lower keyboard are used for controlling video images.
Therefore, no sounds are played even when you press these keys.
Turn the V-LINK function off, or select
Mode 1 for the V-LINK function.
Page
- - -
–
242
AT-500_e.book 243 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Troubleshooting
Problems with the Sound
Noise is heard in the sound
Check
If there is a cell phone nearby, you may hear noise from the ATELIER when an incoming call or outgoing call occurs, or during a conversation.
Solution
Keep the phone as far away as possible, or turn off its power.
When the human voice “Jazz Scat” is selected, playing dynamics do not change the sound
When you release your fingers from keys in the Lower keyboard, the notes continue sounding
“Initial Touch” is set to “OFF.”
The Lower Voice Hold is at ON.
Sound is produced when you take your finger off a key
Some keys (of certain keyboard parts) sound strange
Bass is heard even though you are not playing the Bass Pedalboard
When playing the same sound in the Upper keyboard and Lower keyboard, the volume is different
The sound is not played correctly
Even though you press only one key, a multiple number of notes sound
Pitch is off
Problem
You have selected a “Marimba Treml” or “Banjo Treml” sound.
If you select a “Marimba Treml” or
“Banjo Treml” sound, a sound will also be produced when you take your finger off the key.
You are playing notes outside the recommended range of the voice.
The Pedal [To Lower] button or the Bass
Split is at “ON.”
When the Pedal [To Lower] button is
ON, the Bass will be sounded by the
Lower keyboard.
The “Initial Touch” setting is different between the upper keyboard and lower keyboard.
If you layer the same type of sound (for example, Strings 1 and Strings 5), or play an octave-shifted organ sound, the timing at which you play a note or the phase relationship between the two sounds may affect the way in which the sounds are heard, but this is not a malfunction.
Harmony Intelligence is at ON.
Chord Intelligence is set to “ON.”
Transpose is in effect.
Set “Initial Touch” to “ON.”
Turn “Lower Voice Hold” off.
This is not a malfunction.
This is not a malfunction.
In the Pedal part, press the Pedal [To
Lower] button or set “Bass Split” to
“OFF.”
Set “Initial Touch” to the same setting for both the upper keyboard and lower keyboard.
You are layering sounds of the same type
(e.g., Strings 1 and Strings 5).
Alternatively, you are playing an organ sound with Octave Shift.
This is not a malfunction.
Set “Harmony Intelligence” to “OFF.”
Set “Chord Intelligence” to “OFF.”
Simultaneously press the Transpose [-] [+] buttons to cancel the transposition (the
Transpose [-][+] buttons’ indicators will go out).
Adjust the standard pitch.
Rotary effect is not be applied
The tuning is incorrect.
While set for an octave shift, you are playing keys beyond the recommended range. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Some sounds do not allow the rotary effect to be applied.
Adjust the Octave Shift setting.
This is not a malfunction.
Page
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
243
AT-500_e.book 244 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Troubleshooting
Problem
Chorus effect does not apply
Sound is distorted/cracked
The Bass Range Sounds Odd, or
There Is a Vibrating Resonance
The volume level of the instrument connected to ATELIER is too low.
Pressing the expression pedal while playing back ATELIER performance data produces a crackling noise
Check
Some sounds do not allow the chorus effect to be applied.
The Part Balance volume of each part is too high.
The Reverb volume has been raised when the volume of each Part Balance button is already raised.
The [Master Volume] slider has been used to raise the overall volume excessively.
When listening through speakers:
Playing at loud volumes may cause instruments near the ATELIER to resonate. Resonance can also occur with fluorescent light tubes, glass doors, and other objects. In particular, this problem occurs more easily when the bass component is increased, and when the sound is played at higher volumes.
When listening through headphones:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the ATELIER) would be suspect.
Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor?
The expression pedal function is set to
“PEDAL+COMPOSER” during playback of ATELIER performance data.
When this setting is used, moving the expression pedal while playing back
ATELIER performance data may create a difference between the expression pedal information in the performance data and the volume as set with the expression pedal, which can result in this kind of sound being produced.
Solution
This is not a malfunction.
Press the Part Balance button to lower the volume.
Either lower the Reverb volume, or adjust the Part Balance of each part.
Use the [Master Volume] slider to lower the overall volume.
Use the following measures to suppress such resonance.
• Place speakers so they are 10-15 cm from walls and other surfaces.
• Reduce the volume.
• Move the speakers away from any resonating objects.
Consult your Roland dealer or nearest
Roland Service Center.
Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.
Set the expression pedal function to
“PEDAL” during playback.
Page
- - -
- - -
- - -
Registrations do not Switch Correctly
Problem
The Rhythm or Tempo does not change when you press the
Registration buttons
Check
The settings at which Registrations are recalled (Registration Arranger
Update) has been set to “DELAYED.”
Solution
Set the timing at which the arranger settings are called up (Registration
Arranger Update) to “INSTANT.”
Page
244
AT-500_e.book 245 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Troubleshooting
Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment does not Sound Right
Problem
When you release your fingers from keys in the Lower keyboard while Automatic Accompaniment and Rhythm are playing, the
Rhythm performance only remains playing
Rhythm sounds odd
Check
Chord Hold is set to “OFF.”
Solution
Set “Chord Hold” to “ON.”
The Automatic Accompaniment will play while you press a chord. If Chord Hold is turned ON, the Automatic
Accompaniment will continue playing with the Rhythm even when you take your hand off of the Lower keyboard.
When performance data from a device other than the ATELIER is being played together with the Automatic
Accompaniment, the Rhythm performance may not be sounded correctly.
When a voice is selected for the Pedal
Bass part, the bass of the Automatic
Accompaniment will not sound.
This is not a malfunction.
This is not a malfunction.
The bass note of the Automatic
Accompaniment does not sound
When you started a Rhythm with an Intro, the Rhythm did not sound.
Can’t use Chord Intelligence function
Some Rhythms do not have Rhythm sounds in the intro.
“Chord Intelligence” is set to “OFF.”
This is not a malfunction.
Set “Chord Intelligence” to “ON.”
Tempo not changing even when the source tempo is reselected
(when arranging Rhythms using the Rhythm Customize function)
Automatic Accompaniment sounds odd
Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard
Tempo) is set to “OFF.”
When the Auto Std Tempo setting is set to “ON” and Rhythms are switched while the Rhythm is stopped, the tempo is automatically set to the tempo for that Rhythm.
The tempo setting does not change automatically, even if the Rhythms are switched with the Auto Std Tempo setting set to “OFF” and the Rhythm stopped.
The keys for a chord were not pressed simultaneously.
When “Chord Intelligence“ is “OFF,” the chord is not being pressed correctly.
When performance data from a device other than the ATELIER is being played together with the Automatic
Accompaniment, the Automatic
Accompaniment may not be sounded correctly.
Set “Auto Std Tempo” to “ON”.
Either turn on the Chord Intelligence function, or play the chord correctly.
Either turn on the Chord Intelligence function, or play the chord correctly.
This is not a malfunction.
Page
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
245
AT-500_e.book 246 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Troubleshooting
Song does not Play Correctly
Problem
The volume changes during playback of performance data
Certain instrument are not heard while playing a song
Check
When recording is performed repeatedly while changing the Part
Balance volume, the previouslyrecorded Part Balance data remains in the Control track.
The track is muted.
Solution
If you wish to get rid of the volume changes, use the Erase function to delete the Part Balance data.
Turn off track muting.
Page
-
Recording is not Possible
The recorded performance has disappeared
Problem
Recording is not possible
(If you wish to erase a previouslyrecorded track and then rerecord.)
Check
Press the track button for the desired track to make that button blink before you begin recording.
Touch the track button for the track you want to record in the Rec/Play screen, stopping the button from flashing.
Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the unit is turned off.
Solution
Press the track button for the desired track to make that button indicator blink before you begin recording.
On Rec/Play screen, touch the track button for the desired track to make that button indicator blink before you begin recording.
It is not possible to recover performance data that has been lost.
Before you turn off the power, save the performance data in the Favorites (user memory), USB memory, or a floppy disk.
Page
-
Problems with Playback Functions
Moving your hand over the D
Beam controller does not produce a sound
Problem
Expression Pedal does not operate
Can’t use the function assigned to the foot switch
Check
If a D Beam button is lit in red, moving your hand above the D Beam controller will apply an effect to the sound you play from the keyboard.
The function of the Expression Pedal during recording or the function during playback has been set to
“COMPOSER.”
If “Registration Shift” (change
Registrations) is “RIGHT,” “LEFT,” or
“RIGHT + Load Next,” the foot switch will be dedicated to switching the
Registration.
Solution
Press the D Beam button once again so the button is lit in green.
Set the expression pedal function during recording to “PEDAL,” and during playback to “PEDAL” or
“PEDAL+COMPOSER.”
Set “Registration Shift” to “OFF.”
Page
246
AT-500_e.book 247 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Troubleshooting
Problem
Damper Pedal does not operate
Check
The damper pedal affects only the
Lower keyboard and Upper keyboard.
The damper pedal does not affect the
Bass pedalboard.
The damper pedal does not affect the
Solo voice.
You can change the settings so that the damper pedal affects the Upper keyboard.
Solution
This is not a malfunction.
Page
- - -
Other Problems
Problem
Can’t read/write USB memory
The Touch Screen doesn’t respond correctly
Check
Could you be using USB memory not made by Roland?
The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced if some time has passed since it was last used.
Solution
We cannot guarantee operation if you’re using USB memory not made by Roland.
Reposition the Touch screen.
Unable to save created Rhythm to the User Memory
“Memory Full” appears in the display.
The available memory remaining in the
ATELIER is not sufficient.
First delete some other Rhythm saved to the user memory, then save the Rhythm you have created to the user memory once again.
Page
- - -
247
AT-500_e.book 248 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Error Message
Error Message
Copy Protected.
Can’t Save.
Meanings
To protect the copyright, this music file cannot be saved as SMF format.
Write-Protected Media.
Can’t Save This Song.
Master Disk
Read Only File.
No Media
Media Full
Unknown Media
Media Ejected
Damaged Media
Can’t Read
Can’t Play
No Rhythm
Designated positions are incorrect.
Memory Full
MIDI Buffer Full
Communication Error
The protect tab of the storage media is set to the Protect (write prohibit) position.
Move the tab to the Write (write permit) position and try the operation again.
You can only play the music data. It cannot be saved on a storage media.
This storage media does not allow initialization or saving. Insert a different storage media and try the operation again.
You cannot overwrite-save or delete a file on this storage media.
Storage media is not connected. Please connect storage media.
Saving is not possible because the storage media does not have enough space. Please use other storage media that has been formatted by the ATELIER.
This storage media cannot be used. Please format it.
The storage media was disconnected while it was being accessed. Please try the operation again.
A damaged area was found on the storage media.
This data cannot be read.
Playback was halted because the song could not be read fast enough.
The song could not be read from the storage media fast enough for playback. Press the [Reset] button, then press the [Play/Stop] button once again.
There is no Rhythm in user memory.
The Rhythm used by the selected Registration was deleted from user memory, or its order was changed.
When calibrating the touch panel, the appropriate point was not touched correctly.
If you touch a location other than the specified point, the discrepancy may become severe.
Please be sure to touch the correct point.
The song data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded.
The performance data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded.
Recording or editing is not possible because the memory of the ATELIER is full.
The ATELIER cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device. Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the ATELIER.
A MIDI cable or computer cable has been disconnected. Connect it properly and securely.
The ATELIER is unable to handle the data that was sent. Please send data that the ATELIER is able to handle.
A MIDI transmission error has occurred.
Data transfer failed. Please transfer the data again.
Memory Error
Not found
This is Registration data of a type that is not supported.
The Ext Memory port was subjected to excessive current.
An error occurred in internal memory. Please perform the operation again. If this indication appears even after you’ve repeated the operation several times, please contact Roland service.
A Rhythm or Registration that meets the conditions was not found.
This instrument cannot use this Registration.
USB memory not supported by the ATELIER was connected. This USB memory cannot be used with the
ATELIER.
248
AT-500_e.book 249 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Cm7
Cdim
Cm7 5
Caug
Csus4
C7sus4
C6
Cm6
Chord List
●
symbol: Indicates the constituent not of chord.
★
symbol: Chord shown with an “
★
”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “
★
.”
Chord 1.eps
C C# D E E F
Cmaj7 C#maj7 Dmaj7 E maj7 Emaj7 Fmaj7
C7
Cm
C#7
C#m
D7
Dm
E 7
E m
E7
Em
F7
Fm
C#m7
C#dim
C#m7 5
C#aug
C#sus4
C#7sus4
C#6
C#m6
Dm7
Ddim
Dm7 5
Daug
Dsus4
D7sus4
D6
Dm6
E m7
E dim
E m7 5
E aug
E sus4
E 7sus4
E 6
E m6
Em7
Edim
Em7 5
Eaug
Esus4
E7sus4
E6
Em6
Fm7
Fdim
Fm7 5
Faug
Fsus4
F7sus4
F6
Fm6
249
AT-500_e.book 250 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Chord List
●
symbol: Indicates the constituent not of chord.
★
symbol: Chord shown with an “
★
”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “
★
.”
Chord 2.eps
F# G A A B B
F#maj7 Gmaj7 A maj7 Amaj7 B maj7 Bmaj7
F#7
F#m
F#m7
F#dim
F#m7 5
F#aug
F#sus4
F#7sus4
F#6
F#m6
Gm7 5
Gaug
Gsus4
G7sus4
G6
Gm6
G7
Gm
Gm7
Gdim
A 7
A m
A m7
A dim
A m7 5
A aug
A sus4
A 7sus4
A 6
A m6
Am7 5
Aaug
Asus4
A7sus4
A6
Am6
A7
Am
Am7
Adim
B 7
B m
B m7
B dim
B m7 5
B aug
B sus4
Bm7 5
Baug
Bsus4
B7
Bm
Bm7
Bdim
B 7sus4
B 6
B m6
B7sus4
B6
Bm6
250
AT-500_e.book 251 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Glossary
Arrangement
This refers to changes that have been made in an original tune, by adding a new accompaniment or by changing the instruments used.
Automatic Accompaniment
Automatic Accompaniment is Automatic Accompaniment when just a few keys in the lower section of the keyboard are pressed to specify the chord.
Basic Chord
This refers to the most commonly used types of chord, which are generally the following six types: major chords, minor chords, minor seventh chords, minor seventh (5) chords, dominant seventh chords, and diminished seventh chords.
Chord
Notes of two or more pitches sounded simultaneously. Chords consisting of three notes are called “triads,” and are the most basic type of chord.
Chorus
An effect that adds spaciousness and richness to the sound.
Ending
This is the last part of the accompaniment. When you stop playing the Automatic Accompaniment, the ATELIER plays an
Ending appropriate for the Rhythm.
Glide
An effect that temporarily lowers the pitch and then gradually returns it to normal.
Intro
This is the introductory portion of an Automatic
Accompaniment performance. When Automatic
Accompaniment begins, the ATELIER can add an appropriate intro for each Rhythm.
Inversion
When the lowest note of a chord is the root, the chord is said to be in “root position.” In contrast, forms of a chord in which other notes are the lowest pitch are called “inversions.”
Mute
To silence a sound. The ATELIER provides a Track Mute function that allows you to turn off the track button indicator of a track on which music data has been recorded, so that the corresponding track will temporarily be silenced.
Panel Settings
Settings such as sound selections, tempo, Rotary fast/slow.
Pitch Bend
An effect that smoothly raises or lowers the pitch.
Registration
A set of data that specifies the state of the instrument when performing, including sounds and panel settings.
Reverb
An effect that simulates the reverberation of a room or concert hall.
Root Note
The root note is the basis of a chord. All chords are built on a root note, which is the part of the chord name given in uppercase letters.
Rotary
An effect which simulates the modulation given to the sound when a rotating speaker is used. The Rotary effect produces two types of modulation: fast or slow.
Sound Generator
This is the section that produces the sound. The ATELIER series uses a sound generator that is compatible with GM2/GS.
Split
A function which allows the keyboard to be divided into two or more areas, and a different sound assigned to each area.
The point at which the keyboard is divided is called the “Split
Point.”
Sustain
An effect that adds a decay to each note. The ATELIER allows sustain to be applied to the voices of the upper part, lower part, and pedal part.
Vibrato
An effect that cyclically modulates the pitch.
Voice
The ATELIER is able to produce the sounds of various instruments. These sounds are called “Voices.”
251
AT-500_e.book 252 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Music Files That the ATELIER Can Use
What Are Music Files?
Music files contains musical information such as how long the key for a corresponding pitch is played, the force applied to the key played, and other such information. Performance data is transmitted to the
ATELIER from music files saved in USB memory and CD-ROM, and played back without change as songs. This is different than a audio
CD, since the music file does not contain a recording of the sound itself. This makes it possible to change tempos and keys freely, allowing you to use it in many different ways.
Regarding Copyright
Use of the internal songs and audio files for any purpose other than private, personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder.
Please be aware that if you create derivative works that are based on existing copyrighted material, such as commercially available SMF music files, such works may violate copyright law if used for any purpose other than personal enjoyment. Roland takes no responsibility for any copyright violation you may commit by creating such works.
■
About the ATELIER Sound Generator
The ATELIER come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.
General MIDI
The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the
General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance.
General MIDI 2
The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations, such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the
General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.
In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does not include the new enhancements, is referred to as “General MIDI 1” as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2.
■
The ATELIER Allows You To Use the
Following Music Files
VIMA TUNES
VIMA TUNES is a Roland specification for music files that contains image and lyric data, allowing you to enjoy songs with lyrics and images simultaneously. When data bearing the “VIMA TUNES” logo is played back on a device that bears the same logo, lyrics can be shown on the screen of a connected external display or television, letting you enjoy karaoke or watch a slide show.
* This device (the AT-500) is not able to display images on a television screen.
SMF Music Files
SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file that was formulated so that files containing music file could be widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer of the listening device. An enormous variety of music is available, whether it be for listening, for practicing musical instruments, for Karaoke, etc.
GS Format
The GS Format is Roland’s set of specifications for standardizing the performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI,
Roland’s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music files that have been created with the GS Format in mind). This product supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format, and can be used to play back music data carrying either of these logos.
SMF with Lyrics
“SMF with Lyrics” refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that contains the lyrics. When Music Files carrying the “SMF with Lyrics” logo are played back on a compatible device (one bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display.
The ATELIER come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.
XGlite
XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI specification.
XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone generator.
However, keep in mind that some music files may play back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.
252
AT-500_e.book 253 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off
Settings That Are Stored After the
Power Is Turned Off
Arranger Update
Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard Tempo)
D Beam Sensitivity
Exp. Curve (Expression Curve)
Lyrics
Main Background
Main Bouncing Ball
Master Tune
Metronome Sound
Mic Echo
MIDI IN Mode
Registration Shift
Rhythm Mode
Rotary Color
Rotary Speed
Send PC Switch
Trans. Update (Transpose Update)
USB Driver
Registration Name
Settings That Are Stored In the
Registration Buttons
Registration Name
Registration Shift
Arranger Update
Trans. Update (Transpose Update)
Exp. Curve (Expression Curve)
Rhythm Mode
Settings That Are Stored In the
Individual Registration Buttons
Reverb Type
Reverb Depth
Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
Transpose [-] [+] buttons (Key Transpose)
L Foot Switch Assignment (Left Foot Switch Assignment)
R Foot Switch Assignment (Right Foot Switch Assignment)
Damper Pedal (Damper Pedal Assignment)
[Harmony Intelligence] button (ON/OFF)
Harmony Intelligence Type
Rotary [Fast/Slow] button (ON/OFF)
Rotary [On/Off] button (ON/OFF)
Bender/Vibrato
Pitch Bend Range
Pedal Bass Mode
Solo Mode
Solo To Lower Mode
Solo Split Point
Bass Split ON/OFF
Bass Split Point
Sustain ON/OFF
Sustain Length
Tx MIDI Channel
Initial Touch (Initial Touch Sensitivity)
Vintage Organ Type
VintageOrganVolume
PC Number (Program Change Number)
Bank LSB (Bank Select LSB)
Bank MSB (Bank Select MSB)
Wall Type
The Voices assigned for each part
Level [
▲
][
▼
] button (Part Balance Volume)
The Reverb depth for each part
The Chorus settings (ON/OFF) for each part
The Octave shift settings for each part
The voices assigned to the [Others] buttons for each part
[Drums/SFX] button (ON/OFF)
Drum/SFX Set
[Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF)
Manual Percussion Set
Selected Rhythm
[Intro/Ending] button (ON/OFF)
[Sync Start] button (ON/OFF)
Variation
Chord Intelligence ON/OFF
Chord Hold ON/OFF
Leading Bass ON/OFF
Arranger [ON/OFF] button (ON/OFF)
Lower Voice Hold ON/OFF
Tempo setting
Volume of the Rhythm Accompaniment part
Reverb depth of the Rhythm Accompaniment part
Volume of the Rhythm drum part
Reverb depth of the Rhythm drum part
Volume of the Rhythm bass part
Reverb depth of the Rhythm bass part
253
AT-500_e.book 254 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
MIDI Implementation Chart
Roland Organ
Model AT-500
Basic
Channel
Mode
Note
Number :
Velocity
After
Touch
Function...
Default
Changed
Default
Messages
Altered
True Voice
Note ON
Note OFF
Key's
Ch's
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Prog
Change
System Exclusive
: True #
System
Common
System
Real Time
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
: Clock
: Commands
84
91
93
98, 99
100, 101
74
75
76
77
0, 32
1
5
6, 38
7
10
11
67
71
72
73
16
64
65
66
O x x x x x x x
O x
O x
O
O x x x x x x x x x
O x x x x
O
O
0–127
**************
O
MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted Recognized
1 (Solo)
2 (Pedal)
3 (Lower)
4 (Upper)
11 (Drums/SFX)
13 (Manual Percussion)
16
(Expression, PC, V-LINK)
1 (Solo)
2 (Pedal)
3 (Lower)
4 (Upper)
11 (Drums/SFX)
13
(Manual Percussion)
16 (Expression)
1–16 (GM2/GS)
X
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4 (M=1)
1–16 x x
**************
24–110
**************
O x 8n v=64 x x
*1
0–127
0–127
O x
O
O
*5
*5
*5
*5
*5
*5
*5
*6
*2, 8
*2, 7, 8, 9
*11
*1
*11
*11
*1
*11
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O x x x x x
O
0–127
O
*2, 7, 8, 9
*3, 7, 8
*2, 7, 8, 9
*2, 7, 8
*2, 7, 8, 9
*2, 7, 8, 9
*3, 7, 8, 9
*3, 7, 8, 9
*4
*3, 7, 8, 9
*3, 7, 8
*2, 7, 8
*2, 7, 8
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*2, 8
*3, 7, 8
*3, 7, 8
*3, 8
*2, 7, 8, 9
*3, 7, 8, 9
* 10
Date: Sep. 1, 2008
Version : 1.00
Remarks
Bank select
Modulation
Portamento time
Data entry
Volume
Panpot
Expression
General purpose controller 1 (Glide)
Hold 1
Portamento
Sostenuto
Soft
Resonance
Release Time
Attack Time
Cut off
Decay Time
Vibrato Rate
Vibrato Depth
Portamento control
Effect1 depth
Effect3 depth
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
Program number 1–128
Aux
Message
Notes
: All sound off
: Reset all controllers
: Local Control
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sense
: Reset
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY x x x x
O x
O (120, 126, 127)
O x
O (123–125)
O x
*7, 8
*7, 8
*7, 8, 9
* 1 O x is selectable.
* 2 O x is selectable by SysEx. (GS Part)
* 3 Not received in the keyboard part
* 4 Can be received in the keyboard part
* 5 With MIDI IN Mode 2
* 6 With MIDI IN Mode 1
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
* 7 Received in GM2 mode
* 8 Received in GS mode
* 9 Received in General MIDI mode
* 10 Recognize as M=1 even if M
≠
1.
* 11 V-LINK
O : Yes
X : No
254
AT-500_e.book 255 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Demo Song List
Song Title
Jazz Organ
Donau Wellen
Greensleeves
Pop Organ
Jazz Combo
Slow Waltz
Hawaiian
Dixieland
Soft Gospel
Pipe Organ
Orchestra
Soprano
Tenor
Jazz Scat
Composer
Akio Sasaki
Iosif Ivanovici
Traditional
Ralf Schink
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone
Hector Olivera
Hector Olivera
W.A.Mozart
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone
Player
Akio Sasaki
Yuri Tachibana
Yuri Tachibana
Ralf Schink
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone
Hector Olivera
Hector Olivera
Hector Olivera
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone
Copyright
© 2007 Roland Corporation
© 2007 Roland Corporation
© 2004 Roland Corporation
© 2004 Roland Corporation
© 2003 Roland Corporation
© 2003 Roland Corporation
© 2003 Roland Corporation
© 2003 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
981a
982
Profile
* All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws.
* No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI Out connector.
Akio Sasaki
After graduating from the Berklee College of Music in Boston as a principle, Akio has been active as a top jazz organ player in Japan. He performs live throughout the country, and also teaches at the
Senzoku Gakuen College of Music and at the Kyoto Musical Academy. Additionally, he has published numerous arrangements, works of music theory, and music education books. In 2005 he released his own trio’s CD album “Glide in Blue,” receiving high praise not only from organ fans but also from many jazz fans. In 2007 he released his new album “Fly by Night,” and his musical career continues to expand.
Hector Olivera
Hector Olivera was born in Argentina. He received his education at the Conservatory and the
University of Buenos Aires followed by a scholarship at the famous Juilliard School of Music in New
York. Olivera has performed extensively throughout the world including concerts at prestigious places such as the Notre Dame Cathedral in Paris and Carnegie Hall in New York. Hector Olivera’s expertise involves both the traditional pipe organ and the electronic organ. Presently Olivera tours internationally playing some of the world’s most magnificent pipe organs as well as his preferred electronic organ, the Roland ATELIER for which he continues to collaborate with its development.
255
AT-500_e.book 256 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Demo Song List
Ralf Schink
Ralf Schink was born in Germany and began playing the electronic organ at the age of 9. After completing his formal education Ralf went on to study at the renowned Swiss Jazz School in Bern,
Switzerland as well as the Berklee College of Music in Boston. Since then, his energetic, contemporary style has won him many accolades throughout Europe and around the world. Ralf regularly performs at the Frankfurt Musik Messe, the largest musical fair in Europe. A tremendously versatile and gifted musician, Ralf is comfortable with all types of music. From pop to jazz, Ralf’s repertoire appeals to all age groups. Since 1992 Ralf has been working and touring for Roland
Europe as demonstrator and product consultant. He regularly tours Europe, Asia and Canada.
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone began playing the piano and accordion at the age of two and a half. By the time he was seven, he was performing public and private engagements with his musician father. For more than
20 years Ric has performed and traveled extensively throughout the United States and Europe, delighting audiences with his unique playing style and music arrangements. He is equally comfortable playing the organ, piano or keyboard, as a concert artist and product demonstrator.
Yuri Tachibana
Although Yuri Tachibana began playing the piano at age 3, she switched completely to the organ after winning First Prize in an organ competition. She has expanded her work to include a variety of activities, releasing two albums on Columbia Records and performing organ regularly on the “11
PM” TV program for four years. She further contributes articles on a wide range of musical genres, including classical and jazz, is an accomplished arranger, and has published numerous scores.
In 2002, King Records released Yuri’s album “Organ Chat,” all songs of which were performed and recorded using the Roland Organ Music ATELIER. The album was acclaimed for its unique arrangements and sure playing, prompting the release of “Organ Chat 2” in 2005. Currently, her musical activities range beyond Japan to include the United States, Europe, China, and Southeast
Asia, and she has appeared on numerous CDs from King Records and other record companies as a recording arranger.
256
AT-500_e.book 257 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Short Cut List
Quick Guide Function
While the Quick Guide screen is displayed,
Short Cut
Expression Pedal
[Bender/Vibrato] lever
Upper Keyboard
Lower Keyboard
Pedalboard
Left Foot Switch
Right Foot Switch
Damper Pedal
[Solo To Lower] button
[Pedal Sustain] button
Rotary [On/Off] button
Rotary [Slow/Fast] button
[Count Down] button
Upper Voice select buttons
Solo Voice select buttons
[Alternate] button
Lower Voice select buttons
[Alternate] button
Pedal Voice select buttons
Registration [Write] button
[One Touch Program] button
[Harmony Intelligence] buttons
[Song] button
Screen/Setting
Controller screen/Exp. Curve (Expression Curve)
Controller screen/
Bender/Vibrato
Upper Keyboard screen
Split Point screen
Pedalboard screen/Pedal Bass Mode
Controller screen/
L Foot Switch (Left Foot Switch)
R Foot Switch (Right Foot Switch)
Controller screen/Damper Pedal
Split Point screen
Pedalboard screen/Sustain Length
Effect screen/Rotary Color
Effect screen/Rotary Speed
Rhythm Options screen/Count Down Sound
Upper Keyboard screen
Lower Keyboard screen
Pedalboard screen
Registration Options screen/Arranger Update
Factory Reset screen
Panel Reset screen
Song Clear screen
(If the performance data has never been saved to a USB memory or
“Favorites,” the Song Clear screen appears.)
257
AT-500_e.book 258 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Main Specifications
AT-500: MUSIC ATELIER
Keyboard
Sound Generator
Rhythm
Arranger Function
Music Assistant
One Touch Program
Quick Registration
Drums/SFX Sets
Manual Percussion Sets
Harmony Intelligence
Master Tuning
Key Transpose
Playback Transpose
Effects
Registration
Upper
Lower
Pedal
Initial Touch
49 keys (C3–C7)
64 keys (Waterfall keyboard, A1–C7)
20 keys (C2–G3)
Upper, Lower (10 levels for each)
Sound Generator
Conforms to GENERAL MIDI Level 2, GENERAL MIDI System, GS and XGlite format
128 Max.Polyphony
Voice
Upper Part
Lower Part
Solo Part
Pedal Part
Vintage Organ
Rhythm
User Rhythm
250 Voices (Included 12 Active Expression Voices)
Organ, Orchestral
Organ, Orchestral
Solo
Pedal
Flute (with harmonic bars)
195 Rhythms in 10 groups x 4 variations
99 Rhythms
Rhythm Customize Pattern editing of the internal Rhythms (Drum Set, Beat, Tempo, Note)
Tempo, Arranger On/Off, Start/Stop, Sync Start, Intro, Ending, Intro Count Down, Break, Auto Fill In,
Variation (4 variations), One Touch Program, Chord Intelligence, Chord Hold, Leading Bass,
Auto Standard Tempo, Rhythm Mode
250 titles x 4 variations
195 Rhythms x 2 groups x 4 variations
150 settings in 12 groups
16 Drum Sets + 1 SFX Set
6 sets
18 types
415.3 Hz–466.2 Hz (0.1 Hz steps)
-4–+7 (in semitones)
-6–+5 (in semitones)
Rotary Sound, Chorus, RSS Reverb, Sustain, Vibrato, Pitch Bend, Glide
Registration
Function
8 memories
Load Next, File Edit
258
AT-500_e.book 259 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Main Specifications
Composer
Score Display
File Storage
Rated Power Output
Speaker
Display
Pedals, Switches
Connectors
Power Supply
Power Consumption
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Accessories
Options
Tracks
Note Storage
Song Length
Tempo
Resolution
Recording
Edit Function
7 tracks
Approx. 40,000 notes
Max. 999 measures
20–500
120 ticks per quarter note
Realtime (Replace, Punch In/Out, Loop)
Delete Measure, Delete Track, Erase, Copy, Quantize
DigiScore
(Expanded Display, Lyrics Display, Change of Part Displayed, Note Name Display, Change Clef)
Media
USB memory, floppy disk (in the case of using optional USB floppy disk drive FD-01A)
Save Format
Songs
MUSIC ATELIER original format, SMF format 0
Max. 99 songs for each folder
50 W+50 W
Tweeter
Full-range
5 cm x 2
25 cm x 2
Graphic 800 x 480 dots backlit color LCD with touch screen
Damper Pedal, Expression Pedal, Foot Switch: 2 pcs. (function assignable)
Audio Output Jacks (L/mono, R), Audio Input Jacks (L/mono, R), Video Output Jacks (Analog RGB),
Phones Jacks (stereo) x 2, Mic Input Jack, MIDI Connectors (In, Out), USB Jack, External Memory
Connector (USB Memory connector), Ext Drive Connector, AC Inlet,
AC 117 V, 230 V, 240 V
120 W
Simulated Dark Walnut
Console (included
Music Rest)
1,242 (W) x 653 (D) x 550 (H) mm
48-15/16 (W) x 25-3/4 (D) x 21-11/16 (H) inchess
Stand
Total
1,235 (W) x 599 (D) x 755 (H) mm
48-5/8 (W) x 23-5/8 (D) x 29-3/4 (H) inches
1,242 (W) x 653 (D) x 1,264 (H) mm
48-15/16 (W) x 25-3/4 (D) x 49-13/16 (H) inches
Console
Stand
58.5 kg / 129 lbs
49.5 kg / 110 lbs
Total 108 kg / 239 lbs
Music Rest, Screw for the Music Rest x 2, Knob Bolt x 2, Cord Hook, Panel Sheet, Power Cord,
Owner’s Manual, Voice & Rhythm Guide
Bench, Stereo Headphones, USB Memory, USB Floppy Disk Drive (FD-01A), CD Drive Holder (DH-
01), Microphone
962a
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
259
AT-500_e.book 260 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Index
A
Active Expression Voice ...................................... 59
AEx Voice ......................................................... 59
Alternate ........................................................... 47
Arrangement ................................................... 251
Arranger function ............................................... 78
Arranger Update .............................................. 205
Audio CD ........................................................ 239
Auto Standard Tempo ....................................... 203
Automatic Accompaniment .......................... 78, 251
B
Basic Chord .................................................... 251
Bass Split ........................................................ 149
Bender/Vibrato ................................................ 200
BMP Installer .................................................... 220
Bouncing Ball .................................................... 29
Break .............................................................. 121
Brightness
Rotary Effect ................................................ 130
Brilliance ......................................................... 118
C
Calibration
Touch Screen .............................................. 217
CD-DA ............................................................ 239
Chord ............................................................. 251
Chord Hold ..................................................... 202
Chord Intelligence .............................................. 80
Chord Name
Main Screen ................................................. 29
Chorus ............................................................ 251
Chorus Effect ................................................... 131
code hook ......................................................... 24
Composer ....................................................... 153
Computer ........................................................ 229
Connecting
Audio Equipment ......................................... 228
Computer ................................................... 229
Copying
Measure ..................................................... 184
Performance Song ....................................... 177
Registration ......................................... 114, 116
Rhythm ................................................... 87, 89
Rhythms on Disks into User Memory ......... 87, 177
Correct Timing ................................................. 185
Count Down ...................................................... 78
Count Down Sound .......................................... 202
Count In .......................................................... 164
Count-In Recording ........................................... 176
D
D Beam Controller ........................................... 141
D Beam Controller sensitivity ............................. 201
Damper Pedal ......................................... 118, 199
Decay ............................................................ 118
Delete
Graphic ..................................................... 222
Measure .................................................... 179
Performance Songs ...................................... 172
Registrations ............................................... 110
Rhythms Stored in User Memory ...................... 94
Track ......................................................... 180
Demo Song ....................................................... 33
Demo Song List ................................................ 255
Depth
Expression Pedal ......................................... 124
Disk Rhythm ...................................................... 86
Drums/SFX ....................................................... 66
Drums/SFX Sets ................................................. 67
E
Editing ............................................................ 179
Performance Data ....................................... 179
Effects ............................................................ 125
Ending ........................................................... 251
Erase
Performance Song ....................................... 167
Erase Event ..................................................... 182
Exp. Curve ...................................................... 124
Exp. Src (Play) ................................................. 200
Exp. Src (Rec) .................................................. 199
Expression Pedal ............................................. 123
Function ..................................................... 199
External Display
Connecting ................................................. 232
F
Factory Reset ..................................................... 24
Feet .................................................................. 54
File Edit ............................................ 44, 112, 114
Fill In
Auto ............................................................ 79
Break ........................................................... 79
Foot Switch ............................................. 120–121
Format ............................................................ 220
G
General MIDI .................................................. 252
General MIDI 2 ............................................... 252
Glide ..................................................... 121, 251
GS ................................................................. 252
260
AT-500_e.book 261 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
GS Format ....................................................... 252
H
Harmony Intelligence ........................................ 125
H-Bar Manual .................................................... 57
Headphones ...................................................... 23
Human Voice ..................................................... 60
I
Initial Touch Sensitivity ...................................... 198
Input ............................................................... 227
Intro ............................................................... 251
Inversion ......................................................... 251
K
Key Transpose ................................................. 117
L
Leading Bass ............................................. 82, 121
Load
Individual Registration .................................. 107
Performance Songs ...................................... 171
Set of Registrations ...................................... 106
Loop Recording ................................................ 175
Lower Hold ........................................................ 70
Lower Voice ...................................................... 48
Lyrics .............................................................. 206
M
Main .............................................................. 227
Main Screen ...................................................... 29
Background ................................................ 214
Bouncing Ball .............................................. 214
Manual Percussion ............................................. 68
Manual Percussion Sets ....................................... 69
Master Tune .................................................... 210
Master Volume ................................................... 22
Measure
Copy ......................................................... 184
Delete ........................................................ 179
Metronome ...................................................... 207
Metronome Beat .............................................. 208
Metronome Sound ............................................ 208
Metronome Volume .......................................... 207
Mic ................................................................ 227
jack ............................................................. 23
Mic Echo ........................................................ 211
Mic Volume ....................................................... 23
Microphone ....................................................... 23
MIDI ............................................................... 231
MIDI Devices
Index
Connecting ................................................. 231
MIDI IN Mode ................................................. 212
MIDI In/Out .................................................... 227
Music Assistant .................................................. 37
Main Screen ................................................. 29
Music Assistant Search ....................................... 39
Music CD ............................................... 239–240
Music Files ...................................................... 252
Mute .............................................................. 251
N
Notation ......................................................... 160
O
Octave Shift ...................................................... 64
One Touch Program ..................................... 84–85
P
Panel Reset ..................................................... 219
Panel Settings .................................................. 251
Part Balance ...................................................... 62
Part Balance Monitor .......................................... 63
PC Number ..................................................... 212
Pedal ............................................................... 49
Pedal Bass Voice ............................................... 49
Pedal To Lower ................................................ 152
PedalBass Mode .............................................. 198
Pedalboard Polyphony ..................................... 198
Percussion ......................................................... 56
Performance
Recommended Tones ................................... 238
Phones ........................................................... 227
jack ............................................................. 23
Pitch Bend ....................................................... 251
Pitch Bend Range ............................................. 201
Pitch Bend/Vibrato .......................................... 119
Playback Transpose ......................................... 206
Playing
Demo Song .................................................. 33
Performance Song ....................................... 164
Performance Songs Stored on Floppy Disk ...... 156
Rhythm ......................................................... 75
Power On ......................................................... 21
Produce a Sound Effect
D Beam Controller ....................................... 142
Punch-in Recording .......................................... 174
Q
Quick Guide ..................................................... 41
Index menu .................................................. 42
Main Screen ................................................. 30
261
AT-500_e.book 262 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Index
Quick Registration .............................................. 35
Main Screen ................................................. 29
R
Rec/Play
Main Screen ................................................. 30
Recall
Registration ................................................... 98
Recommend Tone ............................................. 238
Recording ....................................................... 153
Each Part Separately .................................... 165
Performance ............................................... 163
Re-Recording ............................................... 166
Recording onto SMF ......................................... 173
Registration ..................................................... 251
Arranger Update ........................................... 99
Main Screen ................................................. 30
Recall ........................................................... 98
Rename ...................................................... 112
Storing Registrations ...................................... 97
Registration Shift .............................................. 122
Rename
Performance Song ....................................... 167
Registration ......................................... 101, 112
Saved Rhythms .............................................. 92
Re-Recording ................................................... 166
Reverb ............................................................ 251
Reverb Effect ................................................... 136
Depth of the Reverb ............................. 139–140
Reverb Type ................................................ 137
Wall Type .................................................. 138
RGB ............................................................... 227
Rhythm .............................................................. 71
Count Down ................................................. 78
Customize .................................................. 187
fill-in ............................................................. 79
Main Screen ................................................. 29
One Touch Program ....................................... 85
Rhythm Mode .................................................. 203
Rotary ............................................................. 251
Rotary Effect ............................................ 121, 128
Rotary Color ............................................... 130
Rotary Speed .............................................. 129
S
Saving
Performance Songs ...................................... 169
Registration Sets .......................................... 103
User Rhythms .............................................. 197
Search
Rhythm ......................................................... 73
Send PC Switch ............................................... 211
262
Slide Show ..................................................... 224
SMF Format .................................................... 170
SMF Music Files ....................................... 156, 252
SMF with Lyrics ................................................ 252
Solo ................................................................. 50
Alternate ...................................................... 50
To Lower .................................................... 146
Solo Mode ...................................................... 147
Solo To Lower ................................................. 146
Solo Voice ........................................................ 50
Sort
Registration ................................................ 112
Sound Generator ..................................... 251–252
Sound/KBD
Main Screen ................................................. 30
Split ............................................................... 251
Split Point
Bass Split Point ........................................... 151
Solo Split Point ............................................ 148
Sub-window ................................................ 31–32
Sustain ........................................................... 251
Sustain Effect ................................................... 133
Sustain Length ............................................. 135
Sync Start ......................................................... 76
System
Main Screen ................................................. 30
T
Tempo .............................................................. 77
Touch Screen .................................................... 29
Tr. Mute (Track Mute) ....................................... 159
Track
Delete ........................................................ 180
Track Button .................................................... 154
Track Mute ...................................................... 157
Track Mute button ............................................ 159
Transpose
Key Transpose ............................................ 117
Main Screen ................................................. 29
Playback Transpose ..................................... 206
Update ...................................................... 205
Tx MIDI Ch. (MIDI Transmit Channel) ................. 213
Type of Slide Show .......................................... 224
U
Upper Voice ...................................................... 48
Upper/Lower .................................................... 47
Alternate ...................................................... 47
USB ....................................................... 227, 229
USB (MIDI) connector ....................................... 229
USB Driver ...................................................... 230
User Memory ............................................ 72, 218
AT-500_e.book 263 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
User Memory Reset .......................................... 218
User Rhythm .................................................... 187
Save .......................................................... 197
V
VARIATION ..................................................... 121
Variation ........................................................... 79
Vibrato ........................................................... 251
VIMA TUNES ........................................... 234, 252
Voice ........................................................ 46, 251
Volume
Part Balance ................................................. 62
X
XGlite ............................................................. 252
Index
263
AT-500_e.book 264 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
MEMO
264
AT-500_e.book 265 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
MEMO
265
AT-500_e.book 266 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below.
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District Beijing
100011 CHINA
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
TEL: 2415 0911
Parsons Music Ltd.
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
INDIA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
411, Nirman Kendra
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,
Mumbai-400011, INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
INDONESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
Jl. Cideng Timur No. 15J-15O
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
MALAYSIA
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 7805-3263
VIET NAM
Suoi Nhac Company, Ltd
370 Cach Mang Thang Tam St.
Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City,
VIET NAM
TEL: 9316540
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar Al Askalany
Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: (022)-418-5531
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
T.O.M.S. Sound & Music
(Pty)Ltd.
2 ASTRON ROAD DENVER
JOHANNESBURG ZA 2195,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011)417 3400
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 799 4900
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
SINGAPORE
SWEE LEE MUSIC
COMPANY PTE. LTD.
150 Sims Drive,
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
100-108 Soi Verng
Nakornkasem, New
Road,Sumpantawongse,
Bangkok 10100 THAILAND
TEL: (02) 224-8821
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
ASIA
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
For Australia
Tel: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
Tel: (09) 3098 715
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
BARBADOS
A&B Music Supplies LTD
12 Webster Industrial Park
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados
TEL: (246)430-1100
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
CHILE
Comercial Fancy II S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
COLOMBIA
Centro Musical Ltda.
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9
Medellin, Colombia
TEL: (574)3812529
COSTA RICA
JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado
10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
CURACAO
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.
Orionweg 30
Curacao, Netherland Antilles
TEL:(305)5926866
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez
Calle Proyecto Central No.3
Ens.La Esperilla
Santo Domingo,
Dominican Republic
TEL:(809) 683 0305
ECUADOR
Mas Musika
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma
Guayaquil - Ecuador
TEL:(593-4)2302364
EL SALVADOR
OMNI MUSIC
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo II,
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
TEL: 262-0788
GUATEMALA
Casa Instrumental
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11
Ciudad de Guatemala
Guatemala
TEL:(502) 599-2888
HONDURAS
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.
BO.Paz Barahona
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O
San Pedro Sula, Honduras
TEL: (504) 553-2029
MARTINIQUE
Musique & Son
Z.I.Les Mangle
97232 Le Lamantin
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 426860
Gigamusic SARL
10 Rte De La Folie
97200 Fort De France
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 715222
MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico
D.F. MEXICO
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
NICARAGUA
Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales Nicaragua
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503
Managua, Nicaragua
TEL: (505)277-2557
PANAMA
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE
PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (595) 21 492147
PERU
Audionet
Distribuciones Musicales SAC
Juan Fanning 530
Miraflores
Lima - Peru
TEL: (511) 4461388
TRINIDAD
AMR Ltd
Ground Floor
Maritime Plaza
Barataria Trinidad W.I.
TEL: (868) 638 6385
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa
1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
VENEZUELA
Instrumentos Musicales
Allegro,C.A.
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar import
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo
Caracas, Venezuela
TEL: (212) 244-1122
EUROPE
AUSTRIA
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Austrian Office
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
BELGIUM/FRANCE/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Central Europe N.V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
CROATIA
ART-CENTAR
Degenova 3.
HR - 10000 Zagreb
TEL: (1) 466 8493
CZECH REP.
CZECH REPUBLIC
DISTRIBUTOR s.r.o
Voctárova 247/16
CZ - 180 00 PRAHA 8,
CZECH REP.
TEL: (2) 830 20270
DENMARK
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: 3916 6200
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844
Norderstedt, GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
GREECE/CYPRUS
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
HUNGARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint,
HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
IRELAND
Roland Ireland
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
NORWAY
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
POLAND
ROLAND POLSKA SP. Z O.O.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03 664 Warszawa
POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 4419
PORTUGAL
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Portugal Office
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL
TEL: 22 608 00 60
ROMANIA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni,
ROMANIA
TEL: (266) 364 609
RUSSIA
MuTek
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 981-4967
SLOVAKIA
DAN Acoustic s.r.o.
Povazská 18.
SK - 940 01 Nové Zámky
TEL: (035) 6424 330
SPAIN
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
SWEDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
UKRAINE
EURHYTHMICS Ltd.
P.O.Box: 37-a.
Nedecey Str. 30
UA - 89600 Mukachevo,
UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
MIDDLE EAST
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.1231&1249 Rumaytha
Building Road 3931, Manama
339 BAHRAIN
TEL: 17 813 942
IRAN
MOCO INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021)-2285-4169
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons
Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha'alia Hashnia St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
JORDAN
MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.
FREDDY FOR MUSIC
P. O. Box 922846
Amman 11192 JORDAN
TEL: (06) 5692696
KUWAIT
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI
& SONS CO.
Al-Yousifi Service Center
P.O.Box 126 (Safat) 13002
KUWAIT
TEL: 00 965 802929
LEBANON
Chahine S.A.L.
George Zeidan St., Chahine
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-
5857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
OMAN
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.
Malatan House No.1
Al Noor Street, Ruwi
SULTANATE OF OMAN
TEL: 2478 3443
QATAR
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio &
Stores)
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Behind Pizza Inn
Prince Turkey Street aDawliah Building,
PO BOX 2154,
Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 8643601
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
TURKEY
ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.
Galip Dede Cad. No.37
Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 249 85 10
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Ground Floor, Dubai,
U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way
Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4
CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
TEL: (905) 362 9707
U. S. A.
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: (323) 890 3700
As of Oct. 1, 2007 (ROLAND)
AT-500_e.book 267 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
For EU Countries
For China
AT-500_e.book 268 ページ ２００８年７月２８日 月曜日 午後４時１７分
This product complies with the requirements of EMCD 2004/108/EC and LVD 2006/95/EC.
For EU Countries
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
For C.A. US (Proposition 65)
WARNING
This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm, including lead.
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
AT-500
Digital Organ
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938
(323) 890-3700
* 5 1 0
5100001497
0 0 0 1 4 9 7 0 1 *
08-08-1N
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement